Chevrolet - CK Pickup - Owners Manual - 1996 - 1996

. " t The 1996 Chevrolet C/K Pickup Owner’s Manual ............................................................. .................................................................. ..................................................... Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system. FeaturesandControls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. YourDrivingandtheRoad Here you’ll find helpful information and tips aboutthe road and how to drive under different conditions. ProblemsontheRoad This section tells you what todo if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tireor overheated engine, etc. ServiceandAppearanceCare Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. Maintenanceschedule.. This section tells you whento perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricantsto use. CustomerAssistanceInformation This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance andhow to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-8. Index ................................................................................ Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. .............................................................. .................................................................. 1-1 2-1 3-1 4- 1 5-1 ............................................................ 6-1 ................................................................ 7-1 ........................................................ 8-1 9-1 i We support voluntary technician certification. GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name CWPICKUP are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest informationat the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changesin the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Division whenever it appears in this manual. Please keep this manualin your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever needit when you’re on the road.If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manualin it so the new owner can useit. Litho in U.S.A. C9604 B First Edition ii WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual: Aux propri6taires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fraqais chez votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7 @Copyright General Motors Corporation 1995 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Safety Warnings and ‘Symbols Many people read theirowner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, itwill help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures andwords work together to explain things quickly. You will find a number of safety cautionsin this book. We use a box and the wordCAUTION to tell you about things that could hurtyou if you were to ignore the warning. Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of all that’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. A CAUTION: These mean thereis something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to doto help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could behurt. iii -c__ You will also finda circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t dothis,” or “Don’t let this happen.” ~. ~ In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals,you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: NOTICE: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. iv Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING A Q CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: UNLOCK lzjl These symbols are on some of your controls: These symbols have to do with your lights: These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: WINDSHIELD WIPER TURN SIGNALS COOLANT TEMP e BRAKE COOLANT AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES DAYTIME * rn RUNNING LAMPS . * ' a SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY ,111, FOG LAMPS 0 $0 -- BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER FASTEN SEAT BELTS WINDOW DEFOGGER ENGINE OIL PRESSURE VENTILATING FAN ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Here are some other symbols you may see: FUSE LIGHTER (a) a HORN SPEAKER -%- n b b e, p3 FUEL (@) V Model Reference This manual covers these models: Crew Cab Regular Cab Pickup Chassis Cab I Extended Cab Pickup 1- vi c 3500 HD Chassis Cab bags, Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you’ll information find about vehicle your safety use belts how properly. to and can also learn about some things you should air If your vehicle has a manual bucket, split bench or full bench seat, you can adjust it lever with thisfront at the of the seat. the seats in your You not do with Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust It also tells you about them, and fold them up and down. reclining front seatbacks and head restraints. L Y Manual Front Seat IA CAUTION: You can lose controlof the vehicle if you tryto adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startle and 1 confuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust thedriver’s seat only when the vehicle isnot moving. Slide the leverat the front of the seat toward the passenger’s side to unlockit. Using your body, slide the seat to where you wantit. Then, release the lever and try to move the seatwith your body in order to make sure the seat is lockedin place. 1-1 Power Driver’s Seat (Option) Power Lumbar Control If you have power lumbar adjustment, you can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback. If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s side, you can adjust it with these controls at the outside edge of the seat. You can use the round center knob to move the seat where you want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up. To lower the seat, move the knob down. To move the seat forward, move the knob toward the front of the vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the knob toward the rear of the vehicle. You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To raise the front of the seat, move the front lever up. To lower the front of the seat, move the front lever down. To raise the rear of the seat, move the rear lever up. To lower the rear of the seat, move the rear lever down. 1-2 To increase support, press and hold the front of the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support. Reclining Seatbacks Your vehicle will have one of these reclining seatback controls. To adjust a seatbackwith this lever, lift the front of the lever. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Pull up on the front of the lever and the seatback will go to an upright position. To adjust a seatback with this lever, move the lever rearward. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Move the lever again rearward and the seatback will go to an upright position. 1-3 But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. I 1-4 Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries. The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For properprotection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. Thisposition reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. To fold a seatback forward on all seats exceptthe base level bench seat, pull this lever forward and fold the seatback forward. Seatback Latches The front seatbackof the base level bench seat folds forward to let you access the rearof the cab. Your seatback will move back and forth freely, wless you come to a sudden stop. Then it will lock in place. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to fold forward. Access to the rear of the cab is available by using the rear doors. The front seatbackof all seats exceptthe base level bench seat foldsforward to let you access the rear of the cab. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to fold forward. Access to the rear of the cab is available by using the rear doors. To return the seatback to the upright position, justpush the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. The rear seatback of a rear bench seat without a center armrest can be folded forward to let you reach the area behind it. Your seatback will move back and forth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then, it will lock into place. The Crew Cab rear seatback with a centerarmrest folds forward to let you access the area behind it. 1-5 To fold a seatback forward, 1 pull this lever forward and fold the seatback forward. Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only) The driver and passenger front bucket seat and the 60140 split bench seat of your vehicle has an easy entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat. To operate the seat, pull forward on the top of this lever and tilt the back forward toward the front of the vehicle. To return the seatback to the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or push the seat forward until it stops. CA 'JTION: rIf the seatback isn't locl I, it could move forward in a sudden stopor crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback tobe sure it is locked. 1-6 To return the seat to its regular position, return the seatback to its upright position, then push the whole seat rearward until it latches. After returning the seat to its regular position, try to move the seat with your body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place. CAUTION: ; 1 - - If any easy entry seatisn’t locked, it canmove. In a sudden stopor crash, the person sitting there could be injured. And, even if there is no crash or sudden stop, adriver sitting in an unlocked easy entry seatcould be startledby the sudden movement and hit thewrong control or pedal, causing an accident. After you’ve used it, be sure to push rearward on anyeasy entry seat tobe sure it is locked. Rear Seat (ExtendedCab) Folding the Rear Seat The extended cab may have a rear folding seat which can be folded open for more seating space. To use the seat: I . Pull the entire seat forward until it is flat. 2. Then pull forward on the RELEASE lever under the seat cushion, on the passenger’s side of the rear seat. Push the seatback rearward until it latches. 3. After pushing the seatback upright into position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. 1-7 The extended cab’s rear seat can also be folded up to provide more cargo space. To fold the seat: 1. Pull forward on the RELEASE lever at the side of the seat cushion, behind the passenger’s side front seat. Fold the seatback forward until it latches with the seat cushion. 2. Lift the entire seat and push it rearward into place. 3. Make sure the seat is secure. Rear Seat (Crew Cab) You can adjust the seat by sliding the lever at the front of the seat toward the seat support to unlock it. Then, slide the seat to where you want it. Release the lever and try to move the seat with your body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-8 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR), or air bag system. - m - - A CAUTION: Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See“Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes aremild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes’are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts areclear. In most crashes bucklingup does matter ... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s justa seat on wheels. . .. Put someone on it. 1-10 Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn't stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it couldbe the windshield or the instrument panel ... ... 1-11 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers Q; Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearinga safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. If my vehicle hasair bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense. 1-12 Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for salehas required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. @ If I’m a good driver, and I never drivefar from home, why should I wear safety belts? First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your We’ll start with the driver position. control, such as bad drivers. Lap-Shoulder Belt Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). The driver has a lap-shoulder belt.Here’s how to wear it properly. Safety belts are for everyone. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly Adults This part is only for peopleof adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts andchildren. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the partof this manual called “Children.” Follow thoserules for everyone’s protection. 1-13 I I 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don’t let it get twisted. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. I f the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-14 The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restrainingforces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you. To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. 1-15 @ What’s wrong with this? You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against yourbody. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-16 Q."What's wrong with this?' I You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would bethere, not at the pelvic bones.,This could cause seriousinternal injuries. Always buckle your belt into, the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-17 @ What's wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriously injuredif your belt goes' over an armrest like this. The belt would be much belt. too high. Ina crash, you can slide under the The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests. A: The belt is over an armrest. 1-18 I 12.' What's wrong with this? You can be seriously injuredif you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. aIncrash, your body would move too far forward, whichwould increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren't as strongas shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liveror spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulderat all times. 1-19 What’s wrong with this? You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. L A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-20 Supplemental 'Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System . . I ',i ?! This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint [SIR) system or air bag system. Your vehicle may have an air bag for the driver. If it does, it will say Supplemental Inflatable Restraint on the middle part of.the steering wheel. ' To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-21 .. Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: You can be severely injured or killed in a cr; L if you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected fromit. The air bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” Thatis, it works with safety beltsbut doesn’t replacethem. Air bags aredesigned to workonly in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver, should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there’s an air bag for that person. -- -- Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keepyou in position for an air bag inflation in a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with an airbag, and sit as far back asyou can while still maintaining control of your vehicle. AIR BAG There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. 1-22 How the Air Bag System Works A CAUTION:- - Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to, the steering wheel. Also, don’t put anything (suchas pets or objects) between the driver and the steering wheel. If something is between an occupant and an air bag, it could affect the performance of the air bag or worse, it could cause injury. -- When should an air bag inflate? Where is the air bag? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. 1-23 In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one indication of this. The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving. What makes anair bag inflate? In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensing system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen gas, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag module packed inside the steering wheel. 1-24 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air bag inflates? After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in the steering wheel hub will be hot for a short time. The part of the bag that comes into contact with you may be warm, but it will never be too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bag. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing orfrom being able to steer the vehicle, nor will it stop people from leaving the vehicle. 0 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors areactivated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. 0 Let only qualified technicianswork on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service. I When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people witha history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or door. 0 The air bag is designed to inflate only once. After it inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include the air bag module and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace otherparts. NOTICE: If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag, it may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module. Do not open or break the air bagcover. 1-25 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle The air bag affects how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your GM dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Serviceand Owner Publications” in the Index. Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the Q= front of my vehicle, will it keep theair bag from working properly? A: e= For up to two minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped withyellow tape, or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof the air bag system. Be sure tofollow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work foryou is qualified to do so. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-26 A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash. What if I add a snow plow? Will it keep theair bag from working properly? We’ve designed our air bag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including snow plowing with vehicles equipped with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But don’t change or defeat the snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.’’ If youdo, it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an air bag inflation. Is there anything I might add to the frontof the vehicle that could keep the air bag from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, frontend sheet metal or height, they may keep the air bag system from working properly. Also, the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. If you have any question about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.) Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. 1-27 Right Front Passenger’Position Lap Belt The right front passenger’s safety.belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in this section. If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone camit in the center positions. When the lapbelt is pulled out all the way, it willlock. If it does, let it go back .allthe way and start again. Center PassengerPosition I Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) 1-28 Front (All) Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) When you sit in a center seatingposition, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it alongthe belt. 1-29 Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab) Front (All) To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. 1-30 Lap-Shoulder Belt (ExtendedCab) The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. I If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at theend of this section. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-31 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restrainingforces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop ora crash. 1-32 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Crew Cab) You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. If you have an Extended Cab, see “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab)” earlier in this section. To unlatch the belt, justpush the button on the buckle. 1-33 Lap-Shoulder Belt (Crew Cab) The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-34 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which could increase injury. The . shoulder belt shouldfit against your body. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks only if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-35 Children Smaller Childrenand Babies - Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact; the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type andsize for yourchild. A very young child’s hip bones areso small thata regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the beltwill likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a childor infant restraint. I 1-36 at only 25 mph (40 kmh), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure thebaby in an infant restraint. I Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a will become so crash. During a crash baby a heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash CAUTION: (Continued) -- 1-37 Child Restraints Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Where to Put the Restraint (Except Extended Cab and Crew Cab) The child restraint must be secured properly in the center orright front passenger seat. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. 1-38 Where to Put the Restraint (Extended Cab and Crew Cab) Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an infant and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front seat where you can keep an eye on the baby. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. Top Strap Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab) If you have a Crew Cab, see “Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab)” later in this section. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to doit. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-39 1 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. If the shoulder belt goes in frontof the child’s face orneck,’ put it behind the child restraint. 1-40 A 6 . Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing aChild Restraint ina Rear Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab) 5. To tighten the belt,pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. Make sure thebuckle end of the belt is pulled out all the way. I If you have an Extended Cab, see “Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside SeatPosition (Extended Cab)” earlierin this section. 1-41 / You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-42 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-43 Securing a Child Restraint. ina Center Seat Position i You'llbeusingthe I See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. ; i i lap belt. Front (All) 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) 1. Make the belt as long as possibleby tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for thechild restraint. Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-45 You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlierpart about the top strapif the child restrainthas one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the childin the child restraint asthe instructions say. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder beltgoes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-47 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt .and letit go back all the way. The safety,belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Larger Children If you have the choice, achild should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. 1-49 A- CAUTidN: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must beused by only one personat a time. What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, belt is but the childis so small that the shoulder very closeto the child’s face or neck? A: 1-50 Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one. - Never do this. Here achild is sitting in a seatthat has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in thisway, in a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The belt's force would then be applied righton the child's abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. I Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. 1-51 Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for theseat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. 1 Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed,get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. If you ever see a label on the right front passenger’s safety belt in an Extended Cab model that says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a collision.You would see this label on the belt near the door opening. If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section. 1-53 NOTES 1-54 Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem. .: I Keys Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injuredor even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with young children. 2-1 Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition and all door locks. Tailgate You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. To shut the tailgate, firmly push it away from you into the latch. When you put the tailgate back up, pull it back toward you, to be sure that it latches securely. Tailgate Removal If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining new ones. I NOTICE: ~ ~ Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But youcan have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside.You may even have to damage your vehicleto get in.So be sureyou have an extra key. 2-2 The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible finish damage. To remove the tailgate: Third Door (Option) 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cableclips. To release the cable clips, lift the cableso it points straight out and push the cable clipsforward. c I I 2. With the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull back on the tailgate at theright edge and then move the tailgate to the right torelease the left edge. Reverse the above procedure tore-install. Make surethe tailgate is secure. Your vehicle may be equipped with a third door that allows easieraccess to the rear area of an extended cab. To open the door, first open the passenger side front door. Then, use the handle located on the front edge of the rear door. You must close and latch the third door before you can close the front passengerdoor. 2-3 - There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Door Locks From the outside, use your key or the Keyless Entry System, if your vehicle has this option. 1 1 1 1 1 A CAUTION: lock the door from the ITo inside, slide the lever on Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle. -- 2-4 -- your door down. To unlock the door, slide the lever up. Power Door Locks (Option) Press the bottom of the power door lock switch, nlarked LOCK, o n either front door to lock all the doors at once. Press the ribbed side of the switch to unlock all the doors at once. Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Should interference to this system occur, try this: Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. Keyless Entry System (Option) If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors from up to 30 ,feet (9 m) away using the key chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle. 0 Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions on battery replacement. 0 Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. This product has a maximum range. 0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. 0 See your GM dealer or a qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 2-5 Operation Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. If you press this button again within five seconds, all the doors (except the rear seat access door)will unlock. Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only t.wo transmitters matched to it. Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors (except the rear seat access door). When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the interior dome lamps are turned on for 40 seconds or until the ignition is activated. When the LOCK button is pressed, the interior lamps are turned on for a few seconds if the doors are closed.’ If the LOCK button is pressed when a door is open, the interior lamps will stay on for a few seconds after the door is closed. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain transmitter should last about two years. You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the batteries. Use two Duracell@batteries type DL201 6, or a similar type. 2-6 To replace the batteries: Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don’t do it. 1. Insert a dime in the side seam of the transmitter housing, near the key ring hole. When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also locksyour transmission. And remember to lock the doors. 2. Twist the dime to separate the two halves of the transmitter housing. Separate the housing, bottom half first. 3. Remove and replace the batteries. Put the new batteries in with the printed side down. 4. Align the housing and snap the halves together. 2-7 Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? 0 Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box. 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s. 2-8 New Vehicle “Break-In” NOTICE: Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.” But itwill perform betterin the long run if you follow these guidelines: 0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first500 miles (804 km). 0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time your new brake linings aren’tyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. 0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for more information. -- -- Ignition Positions You can use your key to turn your ignition switch to five different positions. LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK. OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if C your vehicle is being pushed). RUN (D): This is the position for driving. START (E): This position starts your engine. i A - i E W ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key. A CAU [ON: On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer thevehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while thevehicle is moving, turn thekey only to OFF. Don’t press thekey release button while the vehicle is moving. 2-9 I NOTICE: If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure itis all theway in. If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn thekey hard. But turn thekey only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or theignition switch. If none of this works, then yourvehicle needs service. Key Release Button The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unless the key release button is used. To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles, turn the key to the OFF position, then press the button and turn the key to the LOCK position. Do not hold the button in while turning the key to OFF. Keeping your finger on the button, pull the key straight out. On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to LOCK and pull it straight out. 2-10 Starting Your Gasoline Engine Manual transmission If you have a diesel engine, see “StartingYour Diesel Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. Automatic transmission The gear selector shouldbe in NEUTRAL (Nj. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature. Move your shift lever to PARK (Pj or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL ( N j only. 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. I NOTICE: I NOTICE: Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped. Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your batteryto be drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds, or until it starts. 2-11 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over. Engine Coolant Heater (Option) In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. When the engine starts,let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the partof this manual that tells how to do it without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. ~- You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To use the coolant heater: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet. 2-12 Automatic Transmission Operation Plugging the cordinto an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat andcause a fire. You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, usea heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. L 4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. I f you don‘t, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolrmt heater plugged in‘? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. There are several different positions for your shift lever. If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, it now features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means that if your key is in the OFF position, rather than the LOCK position, there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. If you have to leave y o ~ key ~ r in the ignition in the OFF position for an extended period, it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery. 2-13 PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. A CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis running unlessyou have to. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). CAUTION: (Continued) 2-14 If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle -- will be free toroil even if your shift lever is in PARK,(P) if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) not in NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. -- -- REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. I NOTICE: Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. A CAUTION: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose controland hit people or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing. 1 NOTICE: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty. 2-15 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(0): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/hj, push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills. You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (03). SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want t o use your brakes off and on. If yo~rmanually select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for 2-16 reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surhces. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST ( I j while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. I NOTICE: If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheatand damage the transmission. Use your brakesor shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. Manual Transmission 5-Speed (with Low Gear) FIRST (2): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST (2) when you’re going less than 20 nlph (32 k d h ) . If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (2), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up o n the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (2). If you try to shift into FIRST (2) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the FIRST (2) position until vehicle speed is reduced. LOW ( 1 ) is intended only for heavy loads and is not recommended for normal driving. For normal driving conditions,start your vehicle moving i n the second gear position (FIRST (2)). LOW (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into LOW (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into LOW (1) only when the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 kmh). If you try to shift into LOW ( I ) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the LOW ( 1 ) position until vehicle speed is reduced. SECOND (3): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. THIRD (4) and FOURTH (5): Shift into the higher forward gears the same way you do for SECOND (3). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL (N). 2-17 NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine. 5-Speed (Without Low Gear) REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait about five seconds forthe internal parts to stop spinning and then shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. I NOTICE: Here’s how to operate your transmission: You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (I), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1). Shift to REVERSE(R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE(R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL (N). 2-18 NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine. ' REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait about five seconds for the internal parts to stop spinning and then, shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage yourtransmission. Shift Speeds A CAUTION: I If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, you could lose controlof your vehicle. And you could injure yourselfor others. Don't shift down morethan one gear when you downshift. NOTICE: ~~ Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. -- ~~ If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or if you race the engine when you downshift, you can damage the engine, clutch or transmission. 2-19 If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or Inore gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good performance. If you have a five-speed manual transmission with low gear (RPO MW3), the following chartsshow when to shift tothe next higher gear for best fuel economy. Acceleration Shift Speeds VIN Code 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 4.3L V6 (W) 15 mph 40 mph (64 km/h) 50 mph (80 km/h) (24 k m h ) Cruise Shift Speeds 4.3L V6 (W) 25-40 mph 45-50 mph (24 M) (40-64 k d h ) (72-80 k m h ) 15 mph Shift Light If you have a manual transmission, you may have a SHIFT light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy. SHIFT When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light when the transfer case is in 4L. 2-20 Locking Rear Axle(Option) Front Axle Locking Feature If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, the locking featurewill allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. The front axlelocks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case. Somedelay for the axle to lock orunlock is normal. If the outside temperature is very hot, or the vehicle has been used under hard driving conditions,there may be a slight delay for the axle tounlock. Four-wheel Drive Manual Transfer Case If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the part that follows beforeusing four-wheel drive. You should use 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) for most normal driving conditions. NOTICE: Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H)or 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions fora long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’sdrivetrain. r The transfer case shiftlever is on the floor to the right of the driver. Use this lever to shift intoand out of four-wheel drive. 2-21 An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer case settings: 2H (2-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 4H (4-Wheel High): This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4H when you need extra traction, such as on wet or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. The front axle portion of the indicator diagram will light LIPwhen you shift into four-wheel drive. Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal. If the indicator light does not light up, or if the front axle light does not go out after you shift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. 2-22 N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed or when using a power take-off. 4L (4-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra power, but should be used only for off-road driving. You can shift from 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) to 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or from 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) to 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) while the vehicle is moving.Your front axle will engage faster if you take your footoff of the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. In extremely cold weather,it may be necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to shift out of 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H). To shift into or out of 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) or NEUTRAL (N): Electronic Transfer Case (Option) 1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h) and shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission press the clutch pedal. 2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion. Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the transfer case into 4-WHEEL LOW (4L), or your gears could clash. Remember that driving in 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) may reduce fuel economy. Also, driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift. When your headlamps or parking lamps are on, rotate the thumb wheel next to the headlamp switch up to brighten, or down to dim, your transfer case indicator light. If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case, the transfer case switches are below and to the left of the climate control system. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among three driving settings: 2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 2-23 4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. 4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give .you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends the maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and climbing ordescending steep hills. Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come,on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed. Shifting from2HI to 4HI Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically. 2-24 Shifting from4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at any speed, and the front axlewill unlock automatically. Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into 4LOis to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1-.6to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stopflashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than 3 rnph (4.8 kmk)and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI Parking Brake To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting outof 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the lever, located just above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE RELEASE. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off. 2-25 NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other partsof your vehicle. Always check to be sure your parking brakeis fully released before you drive. If you are towing a trailer and are parking,onany hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.’ Thatsection shows what to do first to keep the trailer from,moving. If you have a 3500 HD model, it is recommended that the propshaft mounted parking brake be burnished as part of the new vehicle break-in. Theparking brake will work best after it has been burnished following these instructions., Make 10 stops, using the parking brake foot pedal, from 20 mph (32 k m k ) about 2 1/2 miles (4 km) apart. In between stops, drive the vehicle at 20 mph (32 km/h). Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) It can be dangerous to get ofout your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the pehicle can move suddenly.You or others couldbe vehicle won’t move, injured. To be sure’ your even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, ,use the steps thatfollow. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer casein is NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be freeto roll, even if your shift lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Tcywing a Trailer” in the Index. -- 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: 0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear-- not in NEUTRAL (N). 0 Pull the lever toward you. 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 5. Remove the key and take it with you. lr you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). 2-27 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only) It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free toroll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or otherscould be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine runningunless you have to. -- If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) hq%re you release the parking brake. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). 2-2s Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Parking Over Things That Burn Before you get outof your vehicle, put your manual transmission in REVERSE (R), turn off the engine, and firmly .apply the parkingbrake. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t. If you are parkingon a hill, or if you are pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex. A CAUTION: burn. i Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can 2-29 Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust comingin if: Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the roador over road debris. Repairs weren’t done correctly; Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-30 Idling the enginewith the airsystem controloff could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”). Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO)into your vehicle even if the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place canbe a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in the Index.) -- -- Windows Manual Windows It canbe dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and PARK (P). move the shift lever to If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower manual windows. Power Windows If you have the optional power windows, the controls areon each of the side doors. The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN. Press the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window. Press the front of the switch with the power window symbol on it to raise the window. The driver’s window also has an express down feature that allows the window to lower without holding the switch. Press and hold the side of the window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the express 2-31 down mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite sideof the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position. Lockout Switch (Crew Cab) Sliding Rear Window(Option) To open the sliding rear window, unlock the latch lever by moving the lever toward the driver’s side. Release the lever from the latch plate and slide the window toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. To close the window, slide the window toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch lever will automatically snap locked on the latch plate. Try to open the window without releasing the latch lever to be sure the window is in the locked position. If you have a Crew Cab and power windows, the power window switch has a lockout feature. Thisfeature prevents the rear windows from operating when the front driver’s side switch is in the lockout position. The windows can still be operated using the driver’s window switch. When the switch is moved out of the lockout position, the rear power windows will operate again. Horn Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab) On air bag-equipped vehicles, press the air bag module in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn. To open a rear swing-out window, just flip the latch open and swing the glass out. The latch will catch when the window is fully open and hold the window in the open position. 2-32 On vehicles not equipped with an air bag, press the pad in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn. Tilt Wheel (Option) Turn SignalMultifunction Lever A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your: 0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator 0 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer 0 Windshield Wipers 0 Windshield Washer Cruise Control (Option) 2-33 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left)positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the leverwill return automatically. An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. I f you move the lever all the way up or down, and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel also will be on. To signal a lane change, justraise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it. 2-34 Windshield Wipers I You control the windshield For steady wiping at low speed, turn the knob to the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the knob further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the knob to the OFF position. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. Windshield Washer For a single wiping cycle, turn the knob to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle.If you want more cycles, hold the knob on MIST longer. At the top of the lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the knob to choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay. Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle. When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed. 2-35 Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer . fluid level often. A CAUTIVIF: - I I1 reezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can formice on the windshield, blocking your vision, Cruise Control (Option) With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). 2-36 When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off. Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drivesafely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, andyou could lose control.Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. Kesuming a Set Speed Setting Cruise Control I /:\ Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruisewhen you don’t wantto. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switchOFF until you want to use it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise switch from ON to RIA (Resume/Accelerate) for about a 1/2 second. 1 . Move the cruise switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than a 1/2 second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled and even lose control. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 2-37 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There aretwo ways to go toa higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less than a 1/2 second. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control: Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. To slow down in very small amounts, press the button for less than a 1/2 second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Using Cruise Controlon Hills How well your cruise control will workon hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.If the steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than 15 mph (24 krn/h) below the set speed, your cruise control will automatically disengage. When going downhill,you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keepyour speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes youout of cruise control. Many drivers find thisto be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: Step lightly on the brake pedal; or Move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased. 2-38 Lamps Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the driver’s sideof your instrument panel. Rotate the knob clockwise again to the master lamp symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps. Rotate the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off your lamps. Rotate the thumb wheel next to the knob up to adjust instrument panel lights. Rotatethe thumb wheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LEDdisplay to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. You can switch your headlamps from high to low beams by pulling on the turn signalhigh-beam lever. Rotate the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol to turn on: Parking Lamps 0 Sidemarker Lamps Clearance Lamps (If So Equipped) Taillamps License Plate Lamps Headlamps On Reminder A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on and the key is turned to the OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY position. If you need to use your headlamps when the key is turned to OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the buzzer can be turned off by turning the thumb wheel next to the parking lamp/headlamp knob all the way down. Instrument Panel Lights Transfer Case Shift Indicator Light (Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) 2-39 Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: the ignition is on, the headlamp switch is off, and the parking brake is released. When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. 2-40 When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Underhood Reel Lamp Fog Lamps If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps andor low-beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work. The fog lamp switch is on the lower edge of your instrument panel. Press the ribbed top part of the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn them off. A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on. Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps i n the dark without turning on your headlamps. Fog lamps w i l l go off whenever your high-beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again. If you have an underhood reel lamp, it is located inside the engine compartment on the rear passenger side of the engine compartment. You can use it as a flashlight. To use the lamp, pull up on the lever beside it and pull the lamp out. The cord will unreel as you pull the lamp. When you are done using the lamp, reel the cord back into the housing by turning the handle. Then, slide the lamp into the holder. Press PUSH on the lever to hook the lamp into the holder. 2-41 Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control The instrument panel intensity control is located to the right of the headlamp switch. Rotate the thumb wheel up to adjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) rotate the thumb wheel up to the second notch position. Illuminated Entry Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated entry feature. When the doors are opened,the dome lamps will come on if the dome lamp button is out. When all the doors are closed, orthe dome lamp button is pressed in, the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then go out. Front Reading Lamps(Option) If your vehicle has reading lamps, press the button next to the lamp to turn the lamp on. The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want. Press the button again to turn the lamp off. Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors. You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the thumb wheel, located next to the parking/headlamps knob, all the way up to the second notch. In this position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the doors areopened or closed. You can use the dome lamp button, located below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the 2-42 dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are open, orremain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button once. With the button in this position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open.To return the lamps to automatic operation,press the button again and return it to the “out” position. With the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you open the door. Mirrors Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . .. Cargo Lamp Press the ribbed top part of the switch to turn the cargo lamp on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn it off. Press or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce dare from headlamps behind you after dark. The dome lamp switch must be on or one of the doors open for the cargo lamp to work. 2-43 Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass (Option) Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside rearview mirror. When on, the mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. The mirror also includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror Face. When on, the compass When the ignition is on and the mirror switch is in the C/M position, the compass display will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. If, after two seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (N for North, for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may include magnetic antenna mounts, a magnetic note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If removing these items does not correct the condition, see your GM dealer for assistance. When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Compass Variance To use the electrochromic mirror only, move the switch at the bottom of the mirror to the M position. To use the electrochromic mirror as well as the compass, move the switch to the C/M position. To turn both features off, move the switch to the OFF position. 2-44 Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compass variance: 1. Use the CAL switch located at the bottom of the mirror housing near the on/off switch. A safety pin or paper clip can be used to press in the button. Press and hold the CAL switch for five secondsuntil a zone number appears in the display. 2. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 3. Press the CAL switch on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the button in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle and have a clearview of objects behind you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow doorways. Power Remote Control Mirror (Option) Select the mirror you want to move by moving the center of the switch, located on the driver’s door armrest, to R (right) or L (left). Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where you want it. 2-45 Convex Outside Mirror Center Overhead Console (Option) Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Your vehicle may have an overhead console. It has storage compartments inside it. stalling a Garage Door Opener A CAUTION: A convex mirrorcan make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hita vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Storage Compartments Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments designed to store small items. Glove Box To open your glove box, move the button toward the passenger side and pull the door open. 2-46 II If you have a garage door opener, thefront overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener. To install the garage door opener, first open the compartment door by pressing the release button forward. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop patch. Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener, as close to the center of the opener as The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button on the compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener. I F Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button, and press the opener firmly into place. Add one peg at a time until the PUSH button on the compartment door operatesthe garage door opener, with the compartment door closed, when you press the button marked PUSH. Now, with the compartment door closed, press the button marked PUSH again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly. 2-47 With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place, you should only have to press the PUSH button slightly to operate the opener. Adjust the positionof the garage door opener and add or remove pegs, as needed,until the opener operates properly. Sunglasses Storage Compartment Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. The center overhead Compartment can be used to conveniently store your sunglasses. The rear compartment can be used to store a small item, like a book. To open the center compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door. To open the rear compartment, press the release button located at the rearof the compartment door. 2-48 - Memo Pad Holder Your vehicle may have a memo holder attached to the front of the console. Use it to hold pads of paper or similar items. Instrument Panel Cupholder Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the instrument panel. To use the cupholder, pull the handle and slide the cupholder tray open. To close the cupholder, slide it back in the instrument panel. Two cup depressions are provided above the glove box on top of the instrument panel to hold cups or other containers when the vehicle is not moving. Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may have a consolecompartment between the bucket seats. 2-49 There is also a drawer that slides out at the bottom of the console. Cassette/Compact Disc Storage To open it, lift the latch handle and swing the door open. Your console also has a cupholder that swings out for the back seat passengers to use. 2-50 Your vehicle may have a cassettekompact disc holder at the front of the console. The holder will store up to four compact disc cases, up to four cassette tape cases, or any combination of these items that adds up to four. Your vehicle includes a number of storage compartments for storageof often used items. Underhood Storage Area Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument panel. Use these spaces foritems such as gloves or small books. Some models have a storage pocket on each of the front doors. Some vehicles have a storage areabehind the seat. Armrest Storage Compartment Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage compartment in the front bench seat. To open it, fold down the armrest, press the latch handle located at the front of the armrest. Then,let the lid pop up and swing open. The storage compartment has a cassette/compact disc holder. The holder will store up to five compact disc cases and up to six cassette tape cases. There is a storage compartment in the front driver's side of the engine compartment. Lift the cover to access the storage area. The storage compartment also has a folding writing table on top of the armrest lid. To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to hold pads of paper and a pen. 2-51 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter To remove a rear ashtray, press down on the inside tabs and open the door fully. Front Ashtray The front ashtray is located at the bottomof the instrument panel. Pull on the notch inthe ashtray door to open it. t NOTICE: If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could cause a fire andpossibly damage yourvehicle. Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays. To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray, place the bottom part of the ashtray on the pivot bar at the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel. Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position. Rear Ashtray To use a rear ashtray, if you have them, pull at the top of the ashtray door to flipthe door open. 2-52 NOTICE: If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays, theycould be set on fireby cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle. Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. NOTICE: Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element. Just push the lighter all the way in and let go. When it’s done, itwill pop back by itself. Accessory Power Outlets Sun Visors To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows. Your visor may have a strap to hold small items, such as maps. Some visors have an extender on the inside edge. When the visor is down, pull the extender out for extra glarecoverage at the front or side. Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile telephones or other devicesdesigned to operate with vehicle electrical systems. Some visors have mirrors with lamps. If the mirror has lamps, they will come on when you lift the mirror cover. 2-53 Instrument Panel P 2-54 A. Dome Lamp Switch K. Ashtray B. Lamp Controls L.Cupholder C. Air Outlets M. Auxiliary Power Outlets D. Multifunction Lever N. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (Option) E. Instrument Cluster 0. Rear Window Defogger Switch (Option) E Gearshift Lever P. Tilt Lever (Option) G. Audio System Q. Parking Brake Release H. Comfort Control System I. Glove Box R. Hood Release S. Fuse Block J. Storage Tray 2-55 Instrument Panel Cluster CHECK GAGES SERVICE ENGINE SOON l o l o l o l o ] TRIP [o 0 0 0 0 010~1 r A 6 i E R A K E TO SHIFT FROM PARK United States version shown, Canada similar. Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you'll need to know to drive safely and economically. 2-56 1 Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Tamper-Resistant Odometer Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button located near the trip odometer readout. If the reset button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer may not go all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero. ~~ ~ . -~ NOTICE: If you operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, your engineor other parts couldbe damaged. Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the engine with the tachometerin the red area. Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just tolet you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicatewhen there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. 2-58 When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about 55 seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone nor the light will come on. Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. Thelight tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see“Air Bag” in the Index. AIR BAG You will see this light flash for a few seconds when you turn your ignition to RUN or START. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. If the air bag readiness light doesn’tcome on when you start your vehicle, or stayson, or comes on when you are driving,your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle servicedright away. Charging System Indicator Light This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, before starting the engine, as acheck to show After the engine starts,the light should go out. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with your charging system.It could indicate a problem with the alternator drivebelt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distancewith this light on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. 2-59 Voltmeter 9 b 19 When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in the RUN position, this gage shows your battery's state of charge in DC volts. When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. 2-60 Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories. Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there couldbe a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. BRAKE This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brakesystem warning light oncan lead to an accident. If the lightis still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully,have the vehicle towedfor service. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. If the light comes on while you are driving,pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or,the pedal may go closer tothe floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 2-61 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ANTI LOCK Engine Coolant Temperature Gage With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for severalseconds. That’s normal. This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. J If the ‘lightstays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light isn’t on, you still have’brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part. It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation,the gage will read 2 10 F ( 100 C) orless. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 260°F (125°C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260°F ( 125“C).mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready: to warn you if there is a problem. In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See“Engine Overheating” in the Index. 2-62 O Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine) SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions areat acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent, which may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, youremission controls maynot work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and yourengine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that maynot be covered by your warranty. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission controlsystem on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service centerdiagnosis and service is required. Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand service may be required. 2-63 If the LightIs Flashing If the LightIs On Steady The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: 0 Reduce vehicle speed. Did you just put fuel into your vehicle? Avoid hard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Avoid steep uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center forservice. 2-64 Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Are you low on fuel? As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumblingon acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. If you experience this condition, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Oil Pressure Gage 80 The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. 2-65 Shift Light I A LAUTION: This light is used on some models with manual transmissions. Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced. I NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglectedoil problems can becostly and is not coveredby your warranty. 2-66 SHIFT I The SHIFT indicator light will help you get the best fuel economy. See “Shift Light” or “Shift Speeds” in this section for more information. Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light Check Gages Light This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. This light goes on whenever the DRL are on. :::O 0.0 When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator light is a reminder to turn on your headlamps. CHECK GAGES If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be a problem with your oil pressure, coolant temperature, or some other problem. Check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your vehicle serviced right away. 2-67 Fuel Gage The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank. The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you are outof fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible. 2-68 Here are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. 0 At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (F). 0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. 0 The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition. If you have a diesel engine, see“Fuel Gage” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. 0 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems ,,. .-- In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. Comfort Controls Standard Climate Control System Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed.The knob has four speed positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the fan off, move the knob to OFF. Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust the relative air temperature independently of the function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward the red area forwarmer air. Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for coolerair. 3-1 Mode Knob Optional Climate Control System The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob can be placed in any position between two mode settings to blend the flow of air. *e /II VENT This setting directs air through the instrument panel outlets. +’ -be +# VENTMEAT: Use this setting to divide airflow between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets. HEATER: This setting directs air through the floor outlets. w. ?,p#DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield. DEFROST This settingdirects air toward the windshield. 3-2 Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the fan off, move the knob to OFF. If you have the air conditioner on, moving the fan knob to OFF also turns off the A/C compressor. Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. Thisknob will allow you to adjust the relative air temperatureindependently of the function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for coolerair. Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob can be placed in any position between two mode settings to blend the flow of air. -bo /J VENT: This setting directs airthrough the instrument panel outlets. + VENT/HEAT: ’ Use this setting to divide airflow +0 +’ between the floor outletsand instrument panel outlets. 0 HEATER: This setting directs airthrough the heater floor outlets. Q. +’ DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield. DEFROST This setting directs air toward the windshield. Air Conditioning On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape. Thisreduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditionerto work it’s best. The recirculation button, between the fan and temperature knobs, allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also coolsthe air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and/ordust from entering the vehicle. When using the air conditioner, turn off recirculation after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature. When the right knob on the control panel is between HEATER and DEFROST, the recirculation feature will not function. 3-3 The A/C button, between the temperature and mode knobs, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This settingis useful for normal cooling on hot days. When you use A/C with the recirculation button pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortableinterior temperature. With the A/C on, move the temperature knob to MAX for maximum cooling. This setting also puts the system in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools the airthe fastest. After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortabletemperature, move the temperature knob clockwise toplace the air conditioning system in the normal mode. Heating The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it. On cold days, use theHEATER or VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the red area. If you use the engine coolant heater beforestarting your engine (in cold weather (20°F (-8OC) or lower), your heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather. 3-4 The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature, and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output. For more information, see “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Ventilation System For mild outside temperature when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets. Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the side windows closed, airwill flow into the front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air exhaust valves. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the recirculation button pushed in. For more information on the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier in this section. Ventilation Tips e Keep the hood and front airinlet free of ice, snow or j any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. i.? Your vehicle has air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel. You can move the outlets from side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air, or close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open. These outlets do not completely shut off airflow when in the closed position. 0 When you enter a vehiclein cold weather, turn the blower fan to HI for afew moments before driving. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. Thishelps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle. Defogging and Defrosting On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control toward HI. 3-5 Rear Window Defogger (Option) If you see lines running across the rear window, you have the rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass. To turn on the rear window defogger, press this button next to the fan control knob. The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN. For best results, clear the window of as much snow or ice aspossible first. The defoggerwill shut itself off after several minutes. If you need additional warming time, press the button again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window. NOTICE: Don’t use a razor bladeor something else sharp on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Audio Systems Your Delco@audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clock for Systems without Automatic Tone Control AM-FM Stereo Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the correct hour appears on the display. Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic Tone Control Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears on the display. To display the clock with the ignition off, press RECALL and the time will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial two-second delay before the clockgoes into the time-set mode. Playing the Radio VOLUME-BAL: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase the volume, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn the knob counterclockwise. Display the time with'the ignition off by pressing the VOLUME-BAL knob. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency. 3-7 Finding aStation AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM. TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tuneto the next lower station and stay there. SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher station and press the left arrow to tune to the next lower station. Press VOLUME-BAL or both SEEK buttons to stop scannino PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. 3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within five seconds.Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. 3-8 In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three additional stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within five seconds.Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass. TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide the lever down to reduce noise with a weak or noisy station. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: The control behind the VOLUME-BAL knob balances the sound between the right and left speakers. FADE: The control behind the TUNE knob fades the sound between the front and rear speakers. AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player (Option) Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM. TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations. SEEK: Press this button and the radio will tune to the next higher or lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. Playing the Radio VOLUME-BAL: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the radio on and counterclockwise toturn it off. To increase the volume, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn the knob counterclockwise. RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency. 3. Press and hold one of the four pushburrons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three additional stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within five seconds.Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons. 3-9 PSCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of the preset stations. The system will scan through and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass. TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. Slide the lever down to reduce noise with a weak or noisy station. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: The control behind the VOLUME-BAL knob balances the sound between the right and left speakers. FADE: The control behind the TUNE knob fades the sound between the front and rear speakers. 3-10 Playing a CassetteTape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME, FADE and BAL just as you do for the radio. FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop forwarding the tape. REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing the tape. RECALL: Press this button to switch tape sides. EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stopthe tape and play the radio. CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and Automatic Tone Control (Option) SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV) knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume should always sound the same. Each clockwise position on the control ring allows for more compensation at a faster rate. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl and FM2. The display will show your selection. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Turn this control clockwise to increase the volume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The faster the PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is increased or decreased. RECALL: Press this button to switch between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio is on. Also, press this button to display the time when the ignition is off. TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency. When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it to its stored position. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there, The sound will mute while seeking. 3-11 -~ ~ - ~ - ~ . ~ ~ - ~~ SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again. The sound will mute while scanning. AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until MAN appears on the display. This will return the tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. If a TREB or BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). 1. Press AM-FM to.select the band. 2. Tune in the desired station by pressing TUNE or the SEEK left or right arrows. 3-12 --__ __ ~- ~ - ~ -~ - ~ __ ~ -~ 3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. 4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. 5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return andthe tone you selected will be automaticallyselected for that button. P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, FMl or FM2mode and then press PSCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for afew seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press .P.SCANagain or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P.SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is tooweak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (PI-P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station. Setting the Tone Playing a Cassette Tape BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position.Turn the knob clockwise to increase the bass and counterclockwise to decreasethe bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored position when done. Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored position when done. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again to return BAL to its stored position. FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its stored position. To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or Cr02 and adjusts forbest playback sound. For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on the display. Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE, TREB and BASS controls justas you do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for play first. PREV (1): Press the PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. Thetape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other. 3-13 NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum three-second AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to blank gap is required for the player to stopat the beginning of the selection. Thetape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV EJECT Press this buttonto remove the tape. The radio will now play. EJECTcan be used with either the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignitionor radio off, press EJECT before loading thecassette. again. Theradio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during REV operation. 00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise. The double-D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette reel ‘oruntil you press FWD again. Theradio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during FWD operation. 3-14 the radio. player. The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode. CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. CD Adapter Kits Although this is not a recommended practice, it is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player. The adapter kit cassette should begin playing like a regular audio cassette tape once inserted. If the cassette immediately ejects, turn the radio off, turn the ignition on and press and hold the TAPE AUX buttonuntil the tape icon flashes on the display. Insert theadapter cassette again. It will power up the radio and begin playing. This override routine will remain active until the EJECT button is pressed. Playing a Compact Discin the Single Remote Disc Player To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label side up and insert it carefully into the player (approximately half way). The disc will automatically be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and unload CD's with the ignition off. To load a disc with the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player. A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the remote CD player will be pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds. Thisprotects the disc and player from damage. The disc will not start playing. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player. All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will also be displayed. If you have this option, you can play one compact disc (CD) at a time. 3-15 If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that: 0 The disc is upside down. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hour and try again.) You are driving on a very rough road. Please contact your dealer if any error recurs or cannot be corrected. TAPE AUX: With a discloaded in the player and the radio playing, press this button once to play the compact disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If both a cassettetape and CD are loaded, press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc. SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track. It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press theleft arrow again to go toprevious tracks. Press the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc. PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press PREV again togo to the previous track on the disc. 3-16 PROG (2): This button is active only when you have the 12-disc changer. NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc. REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track (song). As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track (song). As the CD advances,elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage. RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn off RANDOM and return to normal operation. EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed. AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (Option) SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV) knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road and wind noise at any particular speed. Thevolume should always sound the same. Each clockwise position on the control ring allows for more compensation at a faster rate. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM 1 and FM2.The display will show your selection. TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Turn this control clockwise to increase the volume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The faster the PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume is increased or decreased. RECALL: Press this button to switch between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio is on. Also, press this button to display the time when the ignition is off. stored position. Rotate theknob clockwise to increase frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency. When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it to its stored position. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. There will be no sound when using the SEEK feature. 3-17 -SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue toscan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again. There will be no sound when using the SCAN feature. - .~ -- I _ P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through 2. Tune in the desired station by pressing TUNE or the SEEK left or right arrows. your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station. 3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. Setting the Tone 4. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ. The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until MAN appears on the display. This will return the tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. When a TREB or BASS control is rotated, tone is automatically set to MAN. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). 1. Press AM-FM to select the band. 5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numberedbutton, the station you set will return and the tone you selected will be automaticallyselected for that button. 3-18 BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Playing a Compact Disc stored position.Turn the knob clockwise to increase the bass and counterclockwise to decrease the bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored position when done. PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note that you can also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc intothe player with the TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to releaseit from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE settingwill change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored position when done. ignition on.) Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appearon the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol. If the disc comesback out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that: Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its stored position. Turn the control clockwiseto adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again to return BAL to its stored position. You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc should play when the road gets smoother.) 0 The disc is upside down. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. 0 It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) 0 The disc player is very hot. FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its stored position. Turn the control clockwiseto adjust the sound to the front and counterclockwise forrear speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its stored position. Press RECALL t.o make ERR go off the display. 3-19 RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to seehow long the CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display. PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection. If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further. Sound is muted in thismode. RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc in random (instead of 1,2, 3. . .) order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to normal play. NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further. The next track number will appear on the display. Sound is muted in this mode. REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at thedesired selection. Release REV to resume playing. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release FWD to resume playing. AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM, FMI or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.) CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.) EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off, press this button to load a CD. Theft-Deterrent Feature 2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret codeto disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed. 3. Turn the radio off. RUN position. TM The THEFTLOCK feature forthe radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate. Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure. NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto time and you must start the procedure overat Step 4. 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down. 5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code. 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off. 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place setmate from the vehicle. 3-21 Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure. If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears. If you lose or forget your code, contactyour dealer. 3-22 Disabling theTheft-Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignitionto the ACCESSORY or RUN position. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no longer secured. If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. When battery power is disconnected from a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display. To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. Understanding Radio Reception FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hillscan interfere with the sound to come and go. To help avoid hearing loss or damage: Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. FM signals, causing AM The range for most AM stations is greaterthan for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interferewith each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble toreduce this noise if you ever get it. Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almostundetectable until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it's veryimportant to do itproperly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle's engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with to check Federal rules your dealer and be sure covering mobile radio andtelephone units. -- -- 3-23 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes ora damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is atfault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, cleanthe tape player. Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning because your unit is equipped with a cut tape feature. To temporarily override this feature (forone insertion), turn the radio off and press and hold TAPE AUX until the tape symbol flashes on the display, then insert the cassette again. Insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your GM dealer. 3-24 You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which usesa cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This typeof cleaning cassette will not eject. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most vehicle washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl. Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or otherdrivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. Rear-end collisions are aboutthe most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance.It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 4-1 Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects fourthings that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: Judgment 0 0 The amount of alcohol consumed Muscular Coordination 0 The drinker’s body weight Vision 0 The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. Attentiveness. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive afterdrinking. For persons under 2 1, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. 4-2 According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce ( 120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. Since alcoholis carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries,it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who will have a consumes food just before or during drinking somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or herchance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! 4-3 The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinkingand driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. 4-4 A CAUTION: I Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affectedby even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking. a driver Please don’t drink and drive or ride with who has‘been drinking. Ride home in a cab; orif a driver whowill you’re with a group, designate not drink. -- -- Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception tinw. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reuction time. Average reaction tinne is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (1 00 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; and the condition of your brakes. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-5 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer tostop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. 4-6 Anti-Lock Brakes Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your hgine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This is normal. ANTI LOCK If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on, See “Anti-Lock Brake’ System Warning Light” in the Index. The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the mostof available tire and roadconditions. 1 Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stoprolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the rear wheels. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. 4-7 Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up tothe brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in two-wheel drive orfour-wheel drive. Braking in Emergencies Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to. With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control’’ accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. 4-8 Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and accelemtion -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerat.orpedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based o n good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. I f you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed s o you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until y o u are o u t of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightuway. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more ef’tective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See ”Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the spacc available. 4-9 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. I OFF-ROADRECOVERY / ..I An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The h c t that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-10 If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing 0 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay i n the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your ~ m v so e you will be increasing speed as the time comes t o move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity. 0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. The driver of a vehicle about t o pass another 011 a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A siInple maneuver’? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error i n judgment, o r a briet’ surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here ate some tips for passing: 0 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. Watch for traffic signs, pavement nlarkings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the load ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on you1 side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. 4-11 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem t o be farther away from you than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. I f you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. 4-12 Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, adriver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering i n a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And i n the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water. snow, ice. gravel or other material is on the road. For safety. you'll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving o n a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering. acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires t o slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow o n the road to make a "mirrored surface" -- and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. Driving Guidelines Off-Road Driving withYour Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive. Also. see "Anti-Lock Brakes" in the Index. Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. "Off-roading" means you've left the great North American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren't marked. Curves aren't banked. There are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery. rough, uphill or downhill. In short. you've gone right back to nature. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that's why it's very important that you read this guide. You'll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. 4-13 Before You Go Off-Roading There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that applyto off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. 0 ~ Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. 0 Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. 0 0 Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks canbe thrown forward during a sudden stop. Yon or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the tapof the seatbacks. Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s center of gravity, makingit more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible. You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “Vehicle L,oading.” “1,uggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index. 4-14 Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment: It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going t o a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. 0 Always use established trails, roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off-road recreational driving; obey a l l posted regulations. It's also a good idea t o travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly. 0 Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment -- shrubs, flowers,trees, grasses -- or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground). Does your vehicle have a winch'? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you'll want to know how to use it properly. 0 Always carry a litter bag -- make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving. 0 Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves and lanterns. 0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle's exhaust system. Getting Familiar withOff-Road Driving It's a good idea to practice in an area that's safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here's what we mean. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, .feet and body, you'll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. 4-15 Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep i n mind. At higher speeds: you approach things faster and YOLI have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. yo~rhave less time to react. you have rnore vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles. you'll need more distance for braking, especially since you're on an unpaved surface. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider. SurJirce Conditions. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances. SLq%zce Ohstucles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can When you're driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash.So, whether you're drivingon or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. 4-16 be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if you're not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider: 0 Is the path ahead clear? Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There's more discussion of these subjects later.) Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? When you drive over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you’re not prepared. When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be o n an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t. Driving on Off-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. Many hills are simplytoo steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you can’t control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injuredor killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness,don’t drive the hill. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. See “Drunken Driving” in the Index. -- 4-17 Approaching a Hill 0 Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)? When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it's one of those hills that's just too steep to climb, descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass orshrubs. Driving Uphill Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill. Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. 0 Is the hill simply too rough'? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places'? Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering whee I. Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don't use more power than you need, because you don't want your wheels to start spinning or sliding. surface cause tire slipping? 0 What's beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don't know. It's the smart way to find out. Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won't have to make turning maneuvers? 4-18 0 Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turnc;. you might want to find another route. Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you're there. Use your headlamps even during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic. Turning or driving across steep hills be can dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured orkilled. When driving uphills, always try togo straight up. Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injuredor killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill. Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. 4-19 ~- @ A: 0 0 0 What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, and I can’t makeit up the hill? As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover. If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do. First, here’s what you should do: Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). I f your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R). 4-20 _ . Here are some things you must not do if you stall, orare about to stall, when going up a hill. Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control. to stop the vehicle. Then Instead, apply the regular brake apply the parking brake. Shiftto REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. 0 Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. I f the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill. you must back straight down the hill. Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decide I just can’t doit. What should I do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission i n FIRST ( 1 )) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it i n some gear. Shifting the tran,_r case to NEUTRAL(N) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is because the NEUTRAL(N) position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. If you are going to leave yourvehicle, set the parking PARK (P) brake and shift the transmission to (or, put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel, 4 High or 4 Low position. 4-L1 Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you'll want to consider a number of things: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could causeloss of'control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and usea low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? What's the surface like'? Smooth'? Rough? Slippery'? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? 0 Are there hidden surface obstacles'? Ruts'? Logs'? Boulders? What's at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks'? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine dragcan help your brakes and they won't have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. A 33 e.' A: Are there some things I should not do when driving downa hill? Yes! 'I'hese are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and havea serious accident. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that's not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive XI-OSS. You could roll over if you don't drive straight down. 0 Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift. This is called "free-wheeling." Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. A: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? Driving Acrossan Incline It‘s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have t o decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are sotne things to consider: Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking brake. 0 Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart the engine. 0 Shift back t o a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 0 If the engine won’t start, get out and get help. A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across at) incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) rnay not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. 0 Surfxe conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, rnuddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over. 4-23 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more. For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. Driving acrossan incline that’s too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt of the incline, don’t drive about the steepness across it. Find another route instead. 4-24 What if I’m driving acrossan incline that’s not too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill.What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the course’’ so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossingan incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts toroll over, you’ll be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay outof the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over, P Getting out on t--_ downhill (low) le c B vehicle stopped across an inclineis dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. ~ 4-25 Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice When you drive in mud, snow or sand,your wheels won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances. It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck. When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink intothe sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. Thiswill improve traction. 4-26 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control. A CAUTION: -- I I - Driving on frozen lakes, pondsor rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice,or sudden thawscan weaken the ice.Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengerscould’drown.Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only. Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. If the water isn’t too deep,then drive throughit slowly. At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stallingcan also occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop. 1 -1ving .--:ough rushing water cal be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream If it’s and you and your passengers could drown. only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll thevehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing water. See “DrivingThrough Water” in the Index for more information on driving through water. 4-27 After Off-Road Driving Driving at Night Remove any brush or debristhat has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a firehazard. After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-28 Here are some tips on night driving. 0 Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare fromheadlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, foryour eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contractrepeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Justas your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t even aware of it. 4-29 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. 4-30 Wt wake cause accidents ’y won’t WI 6 well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving through a large puddleof water or a vehicle wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until yourbrakes work normally. Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some vehicle washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. 4-31 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaninp. it has little orno contact with the road. Driving Through Deep Standing Water I NOTICE: If you drivetoo quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or othervehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. 0 4-32 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: 0 Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. 0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) 0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want, to watch out for what the other drivers aredoing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-33 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder 10 make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 4-34 Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. 0 Windshield Wusher Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? 0 Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape? 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? 0 Weather Forecusts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after aday’s work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it. 4-35 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-36 Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. I f you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about driving off-road.) 0 0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. A CAUTION: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL(N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the workof slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or longhill. A CAUTION: If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhillslope. I 0 0 0 0 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, andyou can climb the hill better. Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. 4-37 Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You'll have a lot less traction or "grip" and will need to be very careful. Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. 4-38 Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. I Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to’begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock‘’ in the Index. ’ What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt: and sand crews can get there. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear: road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before y,ou are onit. Try not tobrake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. 4-39 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your hazard flashers. 4-40 You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. Snow can trap exhaL-- gases under yourvehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it orsmell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collectthere. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from thewind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel forthe heat that you get and it keeps the battery (or batteries) charged.You will need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling lateron with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile. If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a higher speed to getenough heat. Then, shut theengine off and close thewindow almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold.But do it as little as possible. Preservethe fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. 4-41 Loading Your Vehicle r SEE OWNER'S u-- MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION - your front and rear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help on you with this. Be sure tospread out your load equally .both sides of the centerline. 1 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle. .Dl And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. n U A CAUTION: m The CertificationEire label isfound on the rear edge of the driver's door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document in the cab. The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. The Certificatiooire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on 4-42 - In thecase of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bedof your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put thingsin the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured. I Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. A CAUTION: I Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum frontor rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, way your vehicle handles. or it can change the These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle. NOTICE: Your warranty dose not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. If you put things insideyour vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else -- they go asfast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. A CAU I ION: Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. 0 Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. 0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some of them are above the topsof the seats. 0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. 0 When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can. 0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to. There’s also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. 4-43 Truck-Camper Loading Information This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a load your vehicle.can carry, and how to correctly spread out your load. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, PLUS everything elseadded to the camper after it left the factory; everything in the camper; and all the people inside. The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include theweight of the people inside. But, you can figure about 150 Ibs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR. 4-44 Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in glove box for A and B dimensions. Use the rear edge of the load floor formeasurement purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity for the Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance thefront and rear. Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: Your dealer can helpyou make a good vehicle-camper match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR. After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a weigh station and weigh on the front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles. The’loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads should not be more than the GVWR. Open your driver’s door and look at the Certificationflire label to find out your GAWR and GVWR. A. Camper Center of Gravity B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone foryour vehicle’s cargo load. You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extraweight from the CWR. This extraweight may shorten the center of gravity zoneof your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take out some things until all the ,weight falls below the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any loose itemswhen you load your vehicle or camper. When you install and load your slide-in camper, check the manufacturer’s instructions. If you want more information on curb weights, cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the correct centerof gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help you. Just askfor a copy of “Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.’’ If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger. 4-45 You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. (See the “Warranty and Owner Assistance” booklet for Zone Office.) Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety. The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by a body builder in accordance with the information available from the Zone Office. For more information, see “Trailer Towing”in the Index. Towing a Trailer Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from theCWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you won’t go over theGVWR or GAWR. Camper Wiring Harness (Option) A five-wire harness is stored in the front stake pocket on the driver’s side of the bed. Theharness has no connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician. It must be routed out of your vehicle and securely attached so that it won’t be pulled or rubbed while you’re using it. Storethe harness in it’s original position. Wrap the harness toeether and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed. Before you do so, first contact the GM Zone Office foryour area for information on such conversions specific tothis vehicle. 4-46 p c .UTION: If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, youcan lose control when you pull a trailer, Forexample, if the traileris too heavy, the brakes may not work well or even at all, You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your GM dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle. -- If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your GM dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing.If yours was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heaviertrailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe traileringtakes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part.In it are many time-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are important foryour safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. If you do, here are some importantpoints: 0 There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state orprovincial police. Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer aboutsway controls. Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged. Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. 4-47 If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in OVERDRIVE You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). (a). Use one of the following charts todetermine how mucn your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Three important considerations have to dowith weight: the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on yourvehicle’s tires. Above the 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) trailer rating, the engine oil cooler is required on C/K- 1500 models with gas engines and C/K-2500 models with gas engines and 3.73 (or lower) axle ratio. . Weight of the Trailer Above the 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) trailer rating, heavy-duty or gas shock absorbers are required on C- 1500 models, and heavy-duty shock absorbers or the off-road chassis package are required on K-1500 models. How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer areall important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. 4-48 K-1500 (4WD) C-1500 (2WD) Engine(Trans.)AxleRatio 4.3L (Auto.) 3.08 3.42 Max. Trailer Wt. 4,000 lbs.(1 800 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 4.3L (Manual) 3.08 3.42 5.0L (Auto.) Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 3.73 4.3L (Auto.) 4.3L (Manual) 3.73 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg) 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg) 5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg) 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 3.08 3.42 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg) 5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3.73 3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg) 4,000 lbs.(1 800 kg) 5.0L (Manual) 3.08 3.42 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg) 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg) 5.7L 3.42 3.73 6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 5.7L 3.08 3 -42 3.73 5,500 lbs. (2497 kg) 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto) 3.08 3.42 6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg) 7,000 lbs. ( 3 178 kg) * 4-49 C-2500 (2WD) K-2500 (4WD) Engine(Trans.)AxleRatio 4.3L (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 Max. Trailer Wt. 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 4.3L (Manual) 3.42 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) 5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 5,500 lbs. (2 497kg) 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 3.42 3.73 3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg) 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) 3 -42 3.73 4.10 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg) 7,000 lbs.(3 178 kg) 8,000 Ibs. (3 632 kg) 3.42 3.73 4.10 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg) 3.73 4.10 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 5.0L (Manual) 5.7L 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 4-50 Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.TrailerWt. 4.3L (Auto.) 3.73 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg) .4.3L (Manual) 3.73 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) 5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg) 5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3.73 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg) 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg) 5.7L 3.42 3.73 4.10 5,500 lbs. (2497 kg) 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 4.10 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 3.73 4.10 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) K-3500 (4WD) C-3500 (ZWD) Engine(Trans.)Axle 2 (3 lbs. 8,000 4.10 5.7L RatioMax.TrailerWt. 4.56 9,500 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 7.4L 4.10 4.10 4.10 4.56 kg) Ibs. (3,363kg) 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg) 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 1 1,000 Ibs."' (4 994kg) 13,000 lbs? (5 902 kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer Wt. 7,500 4.10 5.7L lbs. (3 405 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 7.4L 4.10 10,500 lbs.* (4 767 kg) 12,500 lbs. #: (5 675 kg) 4.56 *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). 4-51 C-3500 Crew Cab (2WD) Engine (Trans.) 7,500 4.10 5.7L K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD) AxleRatioMax.Trailer Wt. lbs. (3 405 kg) 9,000 lbs.(4086 kg) 4.56 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632kg) 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 7.4L 4.10 10,500 lbs.* (4 767kg) 12,500 lbs.* ( 5 675 kg) 4.56 *Fifth wheel'hitch rating;weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540kg). 4-52 Wt. Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer 7,000 4.10 5.7L lbs. (3 178 kg) 4.56 8,500 lbs. (3859 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 7.4L 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 4.10 10,500 lbs.* (4 767 kg) 12,500 lbs.* (5 675 kg) 4.56 *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). C-3500 HD Chassis Cab Engine (Trans.) 5.7L Axle RatioMax.TrailerWt. lbs. 8,500 4.63 (3 kg)859 5.138,500 lbs. (3859kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 4.63 5.13 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 10,500 lbs.* (4 767 kg) 6.5L Diesel (Manual) 4.63 5.13 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 8,500 lbs. (3859 kg) 12,500 lbs.“ (5 675 kg) 12,500 lbs? 5.13 ( 5 675 kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). 7.4L 4.63 You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet. In Canada, writeto: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7 Weight of the TrailerTongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because itaffects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-53 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see“Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. A B If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. 4-54 Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper. If you’ll be pulling a trailer..that, when loaded, will weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving. Safety Chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to dragon the ground. Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer’brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly. Your trailer brakesystem can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if 0 0 The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure. The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0.02 cubic inch(0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes. If everything checks out thisfar, make the brake tap at theport on themaster cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes.But don’t use copper tubing forthis. If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing. Driving witha Trailer Towing a trailerrequires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive asyour vehicle isby itself. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments),safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. 4-55 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. 4-56 Making Turns NOTICE: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’tstrike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine andtransmission overheating. If you have an automatic transmission, you should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transmission If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see“Engine Overheating” in the Index. Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into gear for a manual transmission. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. 5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL (N). 6 . Release the regular brakes. -- F. It canbe dangerous to get out of your vehicle if (P) with the the shift lever is not fully PARK in parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, evenif your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). -- When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: 0 Start your engine; 0 Shift into a gear; and 0 Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axlelubricant, belt, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections beforeyou start your trip. Trailer Wiring Harness A seven-wire harness is stored under the rear end of your vehicle, between the frame rails. An electrical connector will need to be installed at the trailer end of the harness, by a qualified electrical technician. For additional trailer wiring and towing information please consult your GM dealer. Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring won’t bind or break when turning with the trailer, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. If you tow a trailer, your Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) may not be properly visible from behind. You should select a trailer with a CHMSL on it or, if one is not available, have one installed. Seeyour GM dealer abouthow to connect your vehicle’s wiring to a trailer CHMSL. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4-59 Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. NOTICE: Using a power winch with the transmission in gear may damage the transmission. When operating a power winch, always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling. ’ower Take-Off (PTO) NOTICE: If you have a PTO that will exceed 35 hp installed on yourvehicle, it coulddamage the transfer a PTO case or transmission. When having installed on yourvehicle, make sure that will it not exceed 35 hp. Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s or installer’s instructions. NOTICE: Using a PTOwhile operating in one place before the vehicle has reached normal operating temperature can damage the transfer case or transmission. If you will be using thePTO while operating in one place, drive and warm up the vehicle before using the PTO. 4-60 1. Set the parking brake. Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off (Manual Transmission) 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 1 . Set the parking brake. 3. Hold the clutch pedal down and engage the PTO. 2. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N). I o engage a PTO: NOTICE: Using a PTO for more thanfour hours without driving your vehiclecan damage thetransfer case or transmission. If using a PTO for more than four hours without driving your vehicle, drive your vehicle for a while to allow the transfercase and transmission to cool. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the transfer case into the range you want (if you have four-wheel drive), applythe regular brakes and release the parking brake. 3. Hold the clutch pedal down. If the vehicle will remain in the same place, shift the transmission into the highest gear. 4. Engage the PTO. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the transfer case into the rangeyou want, apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you normally would. When you release the clutch, the PTO will start. 4. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you normally would. When you release the clutch, the PTO will start. 4-61 Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off (Automatic Transmission) 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Shift the transfer case intoNEUTRAL (N). 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 4. Engage the PTO. If you are going to drivethe vehicle, shift the transfer case into the rangeyou want. Then apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission to THIRD(3) to start the PTO. 6. Release the regular brakes to drive thevehicle. Step-Bumper- Pad If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be equipped with a rear step pad at thecenter of the bumper. 4-62 If you will be using the bumper to tow a trailer, you must remove the center cutout circle to install the trailer ball. You must also remove both outer cutouts to attach the trailer safety chaitfs. I To remove the pad, lift the edge of the pad from the rear of the bumper and swing it forward. When the pad releases from the bumper holes, lift the pad off. I , Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road. Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. But they won’t flash if you’re braking. Press the button at the top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first click and release. When the hazard warning flashers areon, your turn signals won’t work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely. I NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result costly in damage to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your vehicle warranty. Don’t try to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it. This could damage your vehicle, even if you have a manual transmission. Andif you have an automatic transmission, won’t it start thatway. ‘ I 5-2 Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous because: .e They contain acid that can burnyou. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, someor all of these things can hurt you. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system, I .NOTICE: ’, If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause aground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N). If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter oraccessory power outlets, if you have this option. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Tn addition, it could save your radio! I NOTICE: If you leave yourradio on, it could be badly damaged. Therepairs wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. If your vehiclehas air conditioning, the auxiliary electric fan under the hoodcan start upeven when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan. 5-3 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the batteries have enough water. You don’t need to add water to the Delco Freedom@ battery (or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amountof fluid is there. If it low, is add water to take care of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas couldbe present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5-4 Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get ashort that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. A CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the enginesare running. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. u 5-5 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) cable. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The otherend of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery. 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 ctn) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine forawhile. 1 1. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 5-6 12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting.Take care that they don’t touch each other orany other metal. Towing Your Vehicle Try to have your GM dealer or aprofessional towing service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance’’ in the Index. If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new, by adding such things as fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions may not be correct. Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: 0 That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has the four-wheel-drive option. 0 The make, model and year of your vehicle. 0 Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and transfer case, if you have one. 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. A. Heavy Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to see them. 5-7 To help avoid injury toyou or others: Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. Never get under yourvehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck. Always use separate safety chains on each side when towinga vehicle. For pickups (except cab chassismodels), use T-hooks on front of vehicle, J-hooks on rear. For cab chassis models, use J-hooks on front and rearof vehicle. A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’t adequately secured. This can causecollision, a serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The vehicle should be tightly securedwith chains or steel cables before is it transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing,etc.) that can be cutby sharp edges underneath thetowed vehicle. When your vehicle is being towed, hav.e the ignition key in the OFF position. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission and transfer case, if you have one, should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance restrictions later in this section or your transmission will be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly. 5-8 Front Towing Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k d h ) , 50 miles (80 km) Rear Towing If these limits must be exceeded, then the rear wheels have to be supported on a dolly. NOTICE: Towing pickupmodels from the rear while loaded with heavy cargo may cause the frame siderails to flex sufficiently to allow the pickup boxto contact thecab and could cause damage to the cab and/or box. 5-9 Engine Ove,rheating (Gasoline Engine) You will find a coolant temperatlJre gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, evenif you just open thehood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyoneaway from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no signof steam or coolant before opening the hood. If you keep driving when your engineis overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 5-10 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: 0 Climb a long hill on a hot day. 0 Stop after high-speed driving. 0 Idle for long periods in traffic. 0 Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools , .. down. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@) or THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions. 5-11 Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see: ,A\ CAUTION: If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary electric fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Engine Fan(s) 5-12 A CAUTION: Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine parts, canbe very hot.Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could cause an engine fire, andyou could beburned. Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive thevehicle. The coolant levelshould be at orabove the COLD mark. If it isn’t,you may have a leakin the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump orsomewhere else in the cooling system. 5-13 I NOTICE: A CAUTION: Engine damage from running your engine without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other liquid like alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning mix. With system is set for the proper coolant plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL antifreeze. TM If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at or above the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.) TM I NOTICE: ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~- ~- In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mix. 5-14 You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don’t spillcoolant on a hot engine. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it. 5-15 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high'speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor thecooling systemand radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. -- 5-16 -- How to Add Coolant to the Radiator 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. I . You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-17 3. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, up to the base of the filler neck. 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD mark. 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 5-18 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s). 7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. . . 1 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. 5-19 Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most every day driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and shouldnot be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch partially disengages. It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages. If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely. 5-20 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goesflat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. A CAUTION: Changing a tire cancause an injury. Thevehicle roll over you or other can slip off the jack and people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent thevehicle from moving: 1. Set the parkingbrake firmly. 2. Put an automatic, transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not inNEUTRAL (N). 4. Tbrn off the engine. CAUTION: (Continued) ' To be even more certain thevehicle won't move, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthestaway from theone being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end. t. i -- The following stepswill tell you how to use the jackand change atire. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Extended Cab Models 2 and 4-DOOr Models The equipment you’ll need is behind the passenger’sseat. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove thejack cover, if there is one. Remove thejacking equipment. If you have a chassis cab, refer to the information from the body supplier/installer for the locationof your spare tire. I f you have an underbody-mounted spare, never remove or restow a tire from an underbody carrier while the vehicle is supported only by a jack. You’ll use the jack handle and the ratchet to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. 5-22 Lower Raise Follow these instructions tolower the spare tire: 1. One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The other side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the ratchet to the hook near the end of the jack handle (as illustrated) with the DOWN marking facing you. Insert the other end through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. H u 2. Turn the ratchet to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. 3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening. A. B. C. D. E. Hoist Assembly Ratchet Jack Handle Hoist Shaft Valve Stem, Pointed Down E Spare Tire G . Retainer H. Hoist Cable 4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. - 5-23 The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the jack handle extension (B), the jack handle (C), the wheel wrench (D) and the ratchet (E). If the flat tireis on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need the jackhandle extension also. 5-24 With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you, rotate the ratchet clockwise. That will lift the jack head a little. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, use the wheel wrench and ratchet to remove them. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise, with DOWN facing you, to remove the wheel nut caps. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire I . Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise, with DOWN facing you, to loosen the wheel nuts. Don't remove the wheel nuts yet. Then take off the hub cap. If the wheel also has a trim ring, use the wheel wrench to pry along the edge and remove it. If the wheel has a smooth center piece or a center piece with recessed nuts, place the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry out. 2. Position the jack under the vehicle. Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported onlyby a jack. 5-25 I NOTICE: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicleor may allow the vehicleto fall off thejack. Be sure tofit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle. Front Position Rear Position 3. With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit. Front Position 5-26 Rear Position 4. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 5 , Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. i I A CAUTION: Rust or dirton the wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, can make ,thewheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or’dirtfrom theplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper orwire brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. A CAUTION: Never use oilor grease on studs ornuts. If you do, the nutsmight come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 5-27 ~~~ 6. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by hand using the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub. 4 0 I Position Position Rear Front 7. Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-28 8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence as shown by rotating the wheel wrench clockwise. A CAI. -JTION: Incorrect whlee1 nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to new get GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque. See “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored. NOTICE: For an underbody spare tirecarrier, stow the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tirecarrier. To stow the tire: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tightenthe wheel nuts in the propersequence and to the proper torque specification. 1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear. 2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 9. Put the wheel trim back on. For vehicles with plastic wheel nut caps, tighten the caps until they are finger tight, then tighten them an additional one-half turn with the ratchet and wheel wrench. 3. Attach the ratchet, with the UP mark facing you, near the hook at the end of the jack handle. Insert the other end,on an angle, throughthe hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools 4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until there are two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tirehoist cannot be over-tightened. A CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehiclecould cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 1 5 . Grasp and push against the tire to be sure it is stored securely and does not move. 5-29 Lower Raise -*-* H C u G E FA. Hoist Assembly B. Ratchet C. Jack Handle D. Hoist Shaft E. Valve Stem, Pointed Down E Flat or Spare Tire G. Retainer H. Hoist Cable Return the jack, ratchet, wheel wrench andjack extensions to their location behind the passenger’s seat. Secure the items and replace the jack cover, if there is one. 5-30 2 and 4-DOOr Models A. Nut B. Jack C. Jack Handle Extension D. Wheel Wrench E. Jack and Tool Storage Box E Ratchet G. Jack Handle H. Tool Retainer C E I F F Chassis CabModels Extended Cab Models A. Nut B. Jack and Tool Cover C. Jack Handle Extension D. Tool Retainer E. Jack and Tool Storage Box E Ratchet G. Wheel Wrench H. Jack I. Jack Handle A. Nut B. Retainer C. Jack Handle Extension D. Jack Handle Extension E. Wheel Wrench E Jack and Tool Storage Box G. Ratchet H. Jack Handle I. Tool Retainer J. Jack 5-31 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don’t want to dowhen your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels too fast. Themethod known as “rocking’”can help you get out when you’re s,tuck, but you must use caution. I A CAUTION:, If you letyour tires spinat high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could be injured. . And, the transmission or other partsof the vehicle can overheat. That could causean engine compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Don’t spin thewheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. 5-32 I NOTICE: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth,you can destroy your transmission. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. I Rocking your vehicle to get it out: Using the Recovery Hooks First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. 5-33 ’ A CAUTION: The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooksat a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others couldbe or cable snapping back. injured from the chain I I NOTICE: I 5-34 Never use the recovery hooksto tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged and it would not be covered by warranty. Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care. Service Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: n @Elv Delco Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to get the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 6-1 Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance.Record” in the Index. You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you tryto do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, and the proper replacement parts and tools beforeyou attempt any vehicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. ‘(English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused.If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. 6-2 Fuel (Gasoline Engine) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this. Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines. Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane orhigher and you still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosisto determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowingyour emission control system to functionproperly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolinesif they comply with the specifications described earlier. In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called MMT. If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. I f this happens, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that contains methanol. Don’tuse it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. NOTICE: I 6-3 Fuels in Foreign Countries-- Gasoline Engines If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper ‘fuelwouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Filling Your Tank The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the left side of your vehicle. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the followingaddress for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation, North American Export Sales (NAES) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 6-4 On a chassis-cab model, refuel the front tank first, or in instances when only a partial fuel fill is desired. I A CAUTION: - Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline. While refueling, hang the cap inside the fuel door. If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in i hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all theway. l To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). 6-5 Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index. When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear at least three clicks. Make sureyou fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. I NOTICE: Checking Things Under theHood A CAUTION: If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary can start up and engine fan under the hood injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing andtools away from any underhood electric fan. If you need a n e w cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one you. for If you get the wrong type, it may not or fithave proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system might be damaged. 6-6 Things that burn canget on hotengine parts and start a fire. These include liquidslike gasoline or diesel fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burn ontoa hot engine. Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle. i. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release, located just to the passenger side of the center of the grill. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly. 6-7 VORTEC” 4300,5000,5700 Engine When you lift up the hood you’ll see: “VORTEC” 5700 engine shown, locations for other engines similar. 6-8 A. Battery H. Fan B. Air Cleaner I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir C. Radiator Cap J. Engine Oil Fill D. Coolant Recovery Tank K. Brake Fluid Reservoir E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir F. Engine Oil Dipstick M. Fuse/Relay Center G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick N. Storage Compartment 6-9 “VORTEC” 7400 Engine A. B. C. D. E. Battery Coolant Recovery Tank Air Cleaner Radiator Cap Air Filter Restriction Indicator 6-10 E G. H. I. J. Engine Oil Dipstick Automatic Transmission Dipstick Engine Oil Fill Fan Power Steering Fluid Reservoir K. Brake Fluid Reservoir L. Storage Compartment M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir N. Fuse/Relay Center Noise Control System The following information relates to compliance with Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,000 Ibs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule booklet provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in your Warranty booklet. 2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person. Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below. Insulation: 0 Engine: 0 These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States. Tampering WithNoise Control System Prohibited Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if so equipped) inoperativeso as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. ran and Drive: 0 Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof 1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device orelement of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or Removal of noise shields or underhood insulation. Removal of fan clutch (if so equipped) or rendering clutch inoperative. Removal of fan shroud (if so equipped). Air Intake: 0 Removal of air cleaner silencer. 0 Reversing air cleaner cover. Exhaust: 0 Removal of muffler and/or resonator. 0 Removal of exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps. 6-11 Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil (Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. It’s a good idea tocheck your engine oilevery time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. ! The engine oildipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located on the passenger side of the engine. 6-12 Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add some oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. The engine oil fill cap for the 4.3L, 5.0L and the 5.7L engine is located on the driver’s side engine valve cover. I NOTICE: r ~~~ Don’t add too much oil.If your engine has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the properoperating range, your engine could be damaged. The engine oil fill cap for the 7.4L engine is located at the front of the engine. Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you‘re through. 6-13 ~. - What Kind of Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking forthe “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS - FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. ~. WOK FOR THIS SYMBOL HOT WEATHER “C + 30 + 27 + 16 +4 -7 - 18 If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart: SAE SW-30 PREFERRED WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6-14 As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE IOW-30 if it’s going to be 0”F (- 18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. When to Change Engine Oil See if any one of these is true for you: 0 I NOTICE: Use only engineoil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@ oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer. 0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or othercommercial application. Driving under these conditions causes engineoil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever occurs first. If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engineoil to break down slower. 6-15 What to Do with Used Oil Air Cleaner Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer?Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.(See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. I f you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or alocal recycling center forhelp. 6-16 Your air cleaner is located between the battery and coolant recovery tank. The air cleaner assembly has an indicator that lets you know when the air filter is dirty and needs to be serviced. The indicator is located in the air intake tube between the air cleanerand the engine. See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index on when to check the indicator. If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is green, no air filter service is required. When the area inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced. To remove the air filter, unhook the retaining clips and remove the cover. Lift the filter and the connected duct out of the air cleanerhousing. Hold the duct and remove the filter by both pulling and twisting the filter away fram the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the filter housing. 6-17 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. I ~ ’ Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop on the duct. Install the duct and the filter into the air cleaner housing. Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing. Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips. After the air filteris properly serviced, the indicator should be reset. Push the button on top of the indicator to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone. 6-18 Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there,and the engine backfires, you could be burned.Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off. NOTICE: If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can cause a damaging enginefire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine,which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. Automatic Transmission Fluid If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. NOTICE: Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts orexhaust system parts,starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate readingif you check your transmission fluid. 0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher. 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600and you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,the fluid and filter do not require changing. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Because this operationcan be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. __ -. .- . -- ~- Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: 0 When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). 0 At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. 0 While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). 6-19 . Checking Transmission FluidHot Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (IO'C), drive the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: Checking Transmission Fluid Cold A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eighthours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F ( 10°C) or more. If it's colder than 50°F (IO'C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during acold check, you nzust perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. Checking the FluidHot or Cold 0 Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). I . Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 6-20 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid touse. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area fora cold check or in the HOT area orcross-hatched area for ahot check. 4. If the fluid level isin the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove$iZZ. We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flipthe handle down to lock the dipstick in place. 6-21 Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing, Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. Then, follow these steps: How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. I NOTICE: Too much or too little fluidcan damage your transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on engine hot parts or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be sure to getan accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. 6-22 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. How to Add Fluid When to Check and Whatto Use Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule, Owner Checks and Services, to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid levelup to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutchsystem in your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal. It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. 6-23 Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant C3 (3500 HD) Trucks Equipped with Dana Rear Axle Additional rear axle scheduled maintenance is required on 3500 HD models equipped with Dana rear axles when they are driven under the following conditions: Extreme loading (at or near GVWR) or trailer towing, and: Operation above 45 mph (70 km/h) for extenuea periods of time I Vehicles used in any of these conditions require the rear axle lubricant be changed every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). Fluid capacity is 4.12 quarts (3.9 L). What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 6-24 Four-wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “PeriodicMaintenance Inspections” in the Index. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-25 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” i n the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch ( 1 2 mm) below the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine coolant. Thiscoolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles (1 66 000 km), whichever occurs first. TM .. . If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole. you’ll need to add some lubricant. 6-26 The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. A 50/50 mixture of water and the proper coolant for What to Use your vehicle will: Use a mixture of one-half dean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze that meets GM Specification 6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer) (GM Part No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change.If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). 0 Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). 0 Protect against rust and corrosion. 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning gages work as they should. TM A NOTICE: C *.UTION: c When adding coolant it is important that you use DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) coolant meeting GM Specification 6277111. If silicated coolant is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. TM -- I Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you o r others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze. TM , 6-27 I NOTICE: If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Checking Coolant If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see“Checking Coolant” in the Diesel Engine Supplement, B I f you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. I NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additiveswhich claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger side at the rear corner of the engine compartment. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark, or a little higher. 6-28 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the coolant recovery tank. A CAUTION: ' - You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot glycol, engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot I I A CAUTION: enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine. Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will at the radiator. almost never have to add coolant Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot. -- -- Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. 6-29 Radiator Pressure Cap (Gasoline Engine) NOTICE: Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap lineup with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. 6-30 When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended. Power Steering Fluid I How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. I f necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. 6-31 Adding Washer Fluid NOTICE: When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. 0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean aswell as washer fluid. 0 Fill your washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This allows for expansion,which could damage the tankif it is completely full. a Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. 0 Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer-fluid until the tank is full. 6-32 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. 1 A CAUTION: If you have too much brakefluid, it can‘spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned, and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, sincea leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-33 Checking Brake Fluid After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above MIN and below the top of the window. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only, and always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap before removing it. @ A CAUTION: You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look at the window on the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. 6-34 With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even workat all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. NOTICE: 0 0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage a few brake system parts. For example, just drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system partsso badly thatthey’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. Brake Wear If you have a C 3500 HD model, it has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). I A CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well. That could leadto an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. 6-35 I NOTICE: Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climatesmay cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Free movement of brake calipers and properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers for movement, brake pads for wear, and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications. If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. 6-36 Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@ battery. Yo11 never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. I _ - CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting”in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. Bulb Replacement Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use. Halogen Bulbs p\ CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and You or can burstif you drop or scratch the bulb. others could be injured.Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 6-37 Headlamps 3. Unplug and remove the headlamp. Sealed Beam Lamps 1. Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer. : .. 4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it in place. 5. Install the retainer to the headlamp and tighten the screws. 2. Pull the headlamp out and remove the retainer. Composite Headlamps 1. Remove the two screws at the top of the radiator support. 2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out. 3. Unplug the electrical connector. 5. Put the new bulb in the lens assembly and turn it to the right until it is tight. 6. Plug in the electrical connector. 7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the two screws. 6-39 Front "urn Signal Lamps (Sealed Beam Headlamps) 4. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly. 1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly. 5. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise and remove it from the socket. 2. Remove the lamp assembly by swinging it out from the inside edge and sliding it out at the outside edge. 3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while turning the socket counterclockwise. 6-40 6. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight. 7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn it to the right until it locks. 8. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back into the vehicle and tighten the screws. Front Turn Signal Lamps (Composite Headlamps) 4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise and remove it from the socket. 2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while turning the socket counterclockwise. 5. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight. 6. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn it socket to the right until it locks. 7. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back into the vehicle and tighten the screws. 6-41 Fender Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheel Pickup Models) 1. Remove the screws 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the lens assembly. and take the fender marker assembly out of the fender. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight. 5 . Put the socket back into the lens assembly and turn it clockwise to tighten it. 6. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 6-42 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. Sidemarker Lamps 1. Remove the screws and pull out the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly. 4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight. 2. Reach through the opening and turn the sidemarker bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Put the socket back into the sidemarker assembly and turn it clockwise to tighten it. 6. Replace the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly and tighten the screws. 6-43 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 2. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket. 6-44 Roof Marker Lamps Taillamps (Pickup Models) 1 . Remove the screws and lift off the lens. 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly. Tailgate Marker Lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the lensbulb assembly from the lens holder. 2. Unplug the lens/bulb assembly at the connector wire. 3. Plug in a new lenshulb assembly and push the connector wire into the hole in the tailgate. 4. Snap the lendbulb assembly into the lens holder. 3. Remove the screws from the bulb retainer and take it off the lamp assembly. 6-45 i 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket. Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models) 1. Using youk hands, peel the rubber seal awaJ from I the lens. 2. Lift the lens off t he lamp assembly. 5. Put in a new bulb and'push it inuntil it istight. 6. Replace the bulb retainer. 7. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws. 8. ClQsethe tailgate. \ 3. Slide the socket out of the lamp assembly. Windshield Wiper Blade Renlacement the socket. For proper type and length, see “Normal Nlalntenance Replacement Parts” in the Index. To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly: 5. Put in a new bulb and, pushing in gently, turn it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Put the socket back in the lamp assembly and replace the lens and lens seal. I . Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is facing away from the windshield. 2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s sideof the vehicle. 3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 . 6-47 I Tires We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with High-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet’ for details. A CAUTIOL. I Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction.You could have an airoutand a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. -- Inflation -- Tire Pressure The CertificatiodTire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads. On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door. Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for that load. I NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get thefollowing: NOTICE: (Continued) NOTICE: (continued) ~ Too much flexing Too much heat Tireoverloading Badwear Bad handling Bad fuel economy. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get thefollowing: Unusualwear Badhandling Roughride Needless damage from road hazards. 0 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. 6-49 How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. FRT II Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km) for any signs of unusual wear. If unusual wear is present, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement’’ later in this section for more information. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see “Dual Tire Operation” later in this section. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your tires. If your vehicle has front tires with different load ranges or tread designs (such as all season vs. on/off road) than the rear tires, don’t rotate your tires front to rear. 6-50 n If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the load range and tread design for your front tires is the same as your rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your tires. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the load range or tread design for your front tires is different from your rear tires,always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating your tires. The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside rear tires become the outside reartires. When you install dual wheels, be sure thevent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side arelined up. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the CertificatiordTire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 6-51 When It’s Time for New Tires Rust or dirton a wheel, or on me parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraperor wire brush later,if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: 0 0 6-52 You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can‘t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Dual Tire Operation Buying New Tires When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certificationflire label. The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generallywears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically. If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding 5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires. Be sure to return to the recommended pressures when no longer drivingunder those conditions. See“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an ”MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly underinflated, the tire can overheat.An overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all tires (including the spare,if any) are properly inflated. 6-53 I A CAUTION: I Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types (radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash, Using tiresof different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tireson all wheels. Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following intormation relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This appliesonly to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewallsof most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver ortemporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of I O to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. 6-54 While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. , Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction -- A, B, C The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature -- A, B, C The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your GM dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. 6-55 Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. NOTICE: If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace then1 only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. I Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on yourvehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others couldbe injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. 6-56 The wrongwheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis. Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles ( 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains NOTICE: Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how many miles it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. If your vehicle has dualwheels or P265/75R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle. If you don’t have dual wheels or if you have a tire size other thanP265/75R16, use tire chains only where legal and only when youmust. Use chains that arethe propersize for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Don’t use chains on the tires of the frontaxle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting yourvehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning thewheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. 6-57 Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure tofollow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: Gasoline Benzene 0 Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone 0 Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: 0 Alcohol 0 Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to getrid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. Here are some cleaning tips: Paint Thinner Turpentine 0 Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change toa clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. .. Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose ! dirt. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch orwelt lines. 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label. Using Solvent-Type Cleaneron Fabric First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap. If you need to use a solvent: 0 Gently scrape excess soil from thetrim material with a clean, dullknife or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressureand clean cloths(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outsideof the stain, “feathering”toward the center. Keep changing to a cleansection of the cloth. 0 When you clean a stainfrom fabric, imediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring. 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. 5. Don’t saturate the material. 6. Don’t rub it roughly. 7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge. 9. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth. 10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer. 11. Wipe with a clean cloth. Fabric Protection Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet thathas been treated with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabricsby repelling oil and water, which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to cleanyour upholstery and carpet often to keep it looking new. I , Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167). 1 Special Cleaning Problems Greasy or Oily Stains Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. 3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They shouldbe removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve them andmay cause them to spread. Non-Greasy Stains Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg,fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. 6-60 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Combination Stains Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow to dry. 0 If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner. Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth. Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand a GM VinyVLeather Cleaner or equivalent product. Cleaning Leather Care of Safety Belts Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap. Keep belts cleanand dry. 0 For stubborn stains, use a GM VinylLeather Cleaner or equivalent product. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather. 0 Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. - A CAU I ION: Do not bleachor dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not beable to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containingsilicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see throughthe windshield under certain conditions. Glass Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner(GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners areused on the inside of the rear window, an electric defoggerelement may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. 6-61 Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or othermaterial may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and replaced when worn. Weatherstrips Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean clothat least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ inthe Index.) 6-62 Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to keep it clean by washing it often withlukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or a 100% cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Careand Materials” in the Index.) Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleanersthat are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Your GM manufactured vehicle may have a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoatpaint finish. Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather and chemical falloutthat can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Finish Care NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirlmarks. Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on chrome or stainlesssteel trim, if necessary. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. 6-63 AluminumorChrome (If So Equipped) Wh ; Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied. The surfaceof these wheels is similar tothe painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on chrome wheels, but avoid anypainted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Tires To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. 6-64 NOTICE: When applyinga tire dressingalways take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. Petroleum-based productsmay damage the paint finish. Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into amajor repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or otherservice outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched intothe paint surface. At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. This appliesonly to materials manufactured and sold by General Motors. Bodies, body conversions orequipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered. 6-65 Appearance Care Materials Chart **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. 6-66 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this labelon the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label is: your VIN, \ PLANT ASSEMBLY E N G I N E A G MODEL CODE YEAR This is the legal identifier foryour vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel, on the driver’s side.You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. TheVIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificatesof title and registration. 0 the model designation, 0 paint information, and a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Engine Identification The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. 6-67 Electrical System Headlamps Add-on Electrical Equipment The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. NOTICE: Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from workingas they should. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. 6-68 Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermallinks. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace abad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the corre.ct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover toaccess the fuse block. You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 6-69 Fuse 4 J E l o7 0 3 0 1 D 0 4 0 5 Usage Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay, Lamp Switch, Keyless Entry, Low Coolant Module, Illuminated Entry Module, DRAC (Diesel Engine) Not Used Cruise Control 014 020 OZ2 023 024 Auxiliary Power Outlet I Fuse Usage Air Bag System License Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps, Roof Marker Lamps, Tailgate Lamps, Front Sidemarkers, Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch Illumination, Fender Lamps, Headlamp Switch Illumination 10 Air Bag System Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer, CHMSL, Hazard Lamps, Stoplamm 11 Wiper Motor, Washer Pump 12 A/C, N C Blower, High Blower Relay 2 Transfer Case 13 3 Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Dome/Reading Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock Relay, Power Lumbar Seat 14 4WD Indicator, Cluster, Comfort Controls, Instrument Switches, Radio Illumination, Chime Module 1 6-70 Fuse Usage 15 DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay 16 Front and Rear Turn Signals, Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid 17 Radio (Ignition) 18 4WAL/VCM, ABS, CruiseControl 19 Radio (Battery) 20 PRNDL, Automatic Transmission, Speedometer, Check Gages Warning Light 21 Not Used 22 Not Used 23 Not Used 24 Front Axle, 4WD Indicator Lamp, TP2 Relay (Gasoline Engine) A Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry Module B Power Windows Underhood Fuse/Relay Center The underhood fusehelay center is located in the rear of the engine compartment near the brake fluid reservoir. Move the retainer clips forthe cover to accessthe fuse block. You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuseextractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 6-71 Fuse Usage GLOW Glow plugs (Diesel Engine) PLUG HORN Horn, Underhood Lamps AUX FAN Auxiliary Fan ECM- 1 Injectors, PCM/VCM A/C Air Conditioning ENG- 1 Ignition Switch, EGR, Canister Purge, EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid, Heated 0 2 , Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine), Water Sensor (Diesel Engine) LIGHTING Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch, Fog and Courtesy Fuses Fuse Usage BATT Battery, Fuse Block Busbar ECM-B Fuel Pump, PCM/VCM IGN-A Ignition Switch RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger IGN-B Ignition Switch IGN-E Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil, A/C Compressor Relay, Hot Fuel Module, Dual Tanks ABS Anti-Lock Brake.Module BLOWER Hi Blower Relay STOP/HAZ Stoplamps FUEL SOL 6-72 Fuel Solenoid (Diesel Engine) Replacement Bulbs Quantity Number Sealed Beam Headlamps 2 H6054 Composite Beam Headlamps 2 6052 Front Marker Lamp 2 194 Front Parking and Turn Lamp 4 2357NA Rear Parking Lamp 2 3057 Rear Stop and Turn Lamp 2 3057 Back-up Lamp 2 3156 Fender Marker Lamp 4 194 Roof Marker Lamp 5 194 License Plate Lamp 2 194 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 4 92 1 Underhood Reel Lamp 1 232 Exterior Lamps 6-73 Interior Lamps Quantity Number Dome Lamps 2 21 1-2 Reading Lamps 2 211-2 uoor Courtesy Lamps 2 194 Four-Wheel-Drive Indicator 1 194 Four-Wheel-Drive Shift Lever 1 194 Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp 1 194 Ashtray Lamp 1 194 Sunshade Vanity Mirror 1 74 Capacities and Specifications Engine RPO Code VIN Code Spark Plug Gap “VORTEC” 4300 TYPe V6 L35 W 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) “VORTEC” 5000 V8 L30 M 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) “VORTEC” 5700 V8 L3 1 R 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) “VORTEC” 7400 V8 L29 J 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 6-74 Wheels and Tires Model Torque C 1500, K 1500, C/K 2500, C/K 3500 (Single Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 lb-ft (190 N.m) C3500 (Dual Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 lb-ft (190 N-m) C-3500HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175lb-ft(240N.m) Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See the CertificatiodTire label on the rear edge of the driver's door or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab. Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer. These specifications are forinformation only. If you have any questions, seethe service manual for the chassis or refer to the body manufacturer's publications. VIN Code Oil Filter Air Cleaner Filter PCV Vr-llve Spark Plugs Fuel Filter Wiper Blades Type Length w M R J PF52 A 1300C CV746C 4 1-932 GF626 22 154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF1218T A 1300C CV796C 4 1-932 GF626 22 154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF12183' A 1300C CV796C 4 1-932 GF626 22 154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF1218 A 1300C cv774c 4 1-932 GF626 22 154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) ?Use a PF52 oil filter if your vehicle has four-wheel drive. 6-75 Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index. Engine “VORTEC” 4300 “VORTEC” 5000 “VORTEC” 5700 “VORTEC” 7400 “VORTEC” 7400 w/3500 HD VIN W M R J Quantity 13 quarts (12.3 L) 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) 25 quarts (23.5 L) J 28.5 quarts (27 L) Crankcase Capacity (Approximate) After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. Engine “VORTEC” 4300 “VORTEC” 5000 “VORTEC” 5700% “VORTEC” 7400% VIN W M R J Quantity with Filter? 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) 5 quarts (4.8 L) 5 quarts (4.8 L) 7 quarts (6.5 L) Oil filter should be changed at every oil change. * Add one additional quart (.946 L) for C-3500 HD Models. 6-76 Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate) Quantity Short Bed .................... . 2 6 gallons (98 L) Long Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 gallons (128 L) Standard Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 gallons (128 L) Chassis-Cab Side Tank . . . . . . . . . . 23 gallons (87 L) Chassis-Cab Rear Tank . . . . . . . . . . 17 gallons (64 L) 3500 HD Models Side Tank . . . . . . . 23 gallons (87 L) 3500 HD Models Rear Tank . . . . . . . 18 to 20 gallons (68 to 76 L) Type Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer. See the refrigerant charge label.under the hood for information regarding refrigerant capacity. Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Introduction IMPORTANTKEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER ,EVEL AND CHANGE A5 RECOMMENDED This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep Y (1 lur vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important.Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplemelzts your tlew vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owzer Assistance booklet,or your GM dealer.for details. 7- 1 How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows what to have done and how often. Someof these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying do to some jobs,you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, havea qualified technician do the work. 7-2 If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked whenever you stop forfuel. It also explainswhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your GM dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done. “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM dealer. This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedulethem. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill perform the work using genuine GM parts. The proper fluids and lubricantsto use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and allnecessamy repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. These schedules are forvehicles that: carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s Certificationmire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. 0 are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle’’ in the Index. 0 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Selecting the Right Schedule First you’ll need to decidewhich of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: Gasoline enginevehicles and diesel enginevehicles have different maintenance requirements. If you have a diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel engine vehicles only. See the Diesel Engine Supplement for diesel engine maintenance schedules. 7-3 Maintenance Schedule ' Short Trip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. You frequently tow a trailer. If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application. One of the reasonsyou should follow this scheduleif you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooneE Short Trip/City Intervals -- Gasoline Engines Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). 7-4 -- At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above 8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or driven under severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles(100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first). Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV)Valve Inspection. These intervalsonly surnnzarite maintenance services. Be sure to.follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. Maintenance Schedule Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the conditions from the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule is true. Driving a vehicle kvith a fully warmed engine under lzighway conditions causes engineoil to break down slowel: ILong Tripmighway Intervals -- Gasoline Engines I ~ ~~ ~ Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Axle Service. At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) Then Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above 8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). -- Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or driven under severe conditionsonly). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first). Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. These interrwls only sunmarize maintemrzce services. Be sure to follow the cornplete 1nuintenanceichedule o n the.following pages. 7-5 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (1 66 000 km) at the same intervals. ** Drive axle service: 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000miles (25 000 km), 0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000miles (25 000 km). 0 More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. 0 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme overloadtrailer towing conditionsand high-speed (above 45 mph or 70 kmh) conditions for extended periods of time must have the drive axle fluid changed every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” inthis section. Footnotes The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. ## Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides,rear driveline center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. 7-6 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-7 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 9,000 Miles (15 000 knz) 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Ewission Contr-ol Service. 0Lubricate chassiscomponents; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassiscomponents; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** c ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE w 7-8 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0If your engine has a thermostatical1Y controlled-cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is CI Noise Emission An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. I L DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY1 Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 7-9 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines 0- 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 21,000 Miles (35000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level andadd fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedomof movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. *c:k DATE 7-10 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every I ' 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Etnission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## I7 Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine h a m thermostatically 3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan, inspect,all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is cz Noise An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 7-12 Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold i n the United States. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BYI I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule.-- Gasoline Engines I 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change 3 months, whichever occurs first). engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Sewice. , I 'i 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. * * I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DA'FE. . ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-13 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline 5 g i n e s I 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (orevery 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; seefootnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE 7-14 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for DroDer caber service Drocedures. m i T r i p / C i t y Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatically 3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan,inspect all hoses and ducts for properhook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,whichever occurs first). 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shieldsand underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.This is a Noise Emission I Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the United States. I I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 3 SERVICED BY: Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the United States. 7-15 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines ~1 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change automatic transmission fluid 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE 7-16 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous rerraln. - When doing frequent trailer towing. 1 I I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 3 months, whichever occurs first). delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not pequire’changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 0Change engine oil and filter (or every SERVICED BY: An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE . ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-17 i -- Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines - 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE 7-18 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only:Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shieldsand underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replaceas required. This is a NoiseEmission 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, inspectall hoses and ducts for properhook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 0Inspect engineaccessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0Conduct ExhaustGas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in the service manual.An Einission Control Service. 3- (Continued) Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 7-19 I Short TripKity Maint-nance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 63,OOO.Miles(105 000 kmj 0,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) 0Conduct evaporative controlsystem inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Checkthat the purge valve works properly (if equipped). Replace asneeded. An Emission Control Service. 17 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel capgasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. I DATE 7-20 I I Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 3- ACTUAL MILEAGE ISEWICED BY:I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 0Change 0Change engine oil and filter (or every engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velo.city joints and axle sealsfor leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedomof movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). Cl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. * * DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engineoiLand filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An E1nission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking. ** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y Control Service. Appliccrble only to velzicles sold in the United Stcltes. 7-22 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 0If your engine has a thermostatically . controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is CI Noise Emission Coitttxd Service. Applicable o111yto vel?ic:lessold irz the United Stntes. I 3 months, whichever occurs first). Au Emission Contt-ol Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedomof movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. I 1 DATE 0Change engine oil and filter (or every ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-23 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines1 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every El Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. AI? Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** DATE 7-24 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 3 months, whichever occurs first). Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** I I DATE I i Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter.An Emission ControlService. Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. (Continued) 7-25 I Short Wip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 Ibs. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise E17?issiun Control Service. Applicuble on.ly to vehicles sold in the United States. 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is LE Noise 3 months, whichever occurs first). AH Elnission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** Emission Control Service. Applicable only tu vehicles sold in the United Stutes. I DATE 7-26 I ACTUALMILEAGE ISERVICED B Y DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) 99,000 Miles (165000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE 1 SERVICED B Y 7-27 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant”in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. ’f 0Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR isover 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F (32 O C) or higher. 7-28 In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. - not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the*fluid and filter donot require changing. I f y o ~ do l Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change 0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation ( P c v ) valve. An Emission Control Service. DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE BY: Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. ** Drive axle service: 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). 0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid levet and add fluid as needed at every engine oil change. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). 0 More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. 0 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme overloadtrailer towing conditions and high-speed (above 45 mph or 70 kmk)conditions for extended periods of time must havethe drive axle fluid changed every 30,000 miles (50 OOO km). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section. Footnotes 7 The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift linkage,parking brake cable guides, rear driveline center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (- 12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. 7-29 I LongTrip/Highy ay Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 7-30 Ai1 Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Ernissiorz Control Service. Appliccrble only to vehicles sold in the United States. Long TripKIighway lwaintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is (1 Noise Emission Control Service. Applirnhleonly to vehicles sold in the United States. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 7-31 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasolim Engines 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is LZ Noise Emission Control Service. Applicvlhle only to vehic1t.s sold in the United Stutks. 7-32 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan,inspect all hoses and ducts forproper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly.This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United Stutes. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. A n Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid leveliandadd fluid as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replaceas required. This is CI Noise Emission Control Service. Applicuhle only to vehicles sold the United States. i11 (Continued) 7-33 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) (Continued) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0If your engine has a thermostatically 0Change automatic transmission fluid controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts forproper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. I DATE 7-34 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 9OoF (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedL,z -- Gasolin, Engines 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) - Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). delivery service. do not use your vehicle under uny of these cwnditiorzs, rhefll.tid and filter d o not require clmlzgiq. IfJwu Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. An Emission C o m d Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ‘H Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage 12 months, whichever occurs first). or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid asneeded. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. -f- An Emission Control Service. 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emissiotz Control Service. Appliccrble only to vehicles sold in the United States. 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts forproper hook-up (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly.This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Appliccrble only to vehicles sold in the United States. 7-36 I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 1 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) c]Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in the service manual. An Emission Control Service.-t0Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed. An Emission Control Service. 3- DATE ._ ACTUAL MILEAGE Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis com.ponents; see footnote # (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manualfor proper caliper service procedures. SERVICED BY: - 7-37 [ Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I Gasoline Engines I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage orlooseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the United States. 7-38 0If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly.This is CI Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An EnIission Control Servic-e. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM ’.servicemanual for proper caliper service procedures. I 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Cotztrol Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#/ (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (orat each brake relining, whichever occurs first). [7 Replace fuel filter. All Emission Control Service. (Continued) 7-39 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 97,500 Miles (142 500 km) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles soldin the United States. O’If your engine has a thermostatically controlled cooling fan, i.nspect all hoses and ducts for proper hook-up (or every -12months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the valve works properly. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in the United States. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. S e e “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ” I I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline EnginPC I 100,000 Miles ( I 66 000 km) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. -f 0Inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90”F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. - I f you do not use your vehicle under m y of these conditions, the fluid and filter donot require chmging. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 0 Inspect Positive CrankcaseVentilation (PCV) valve. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Check the engine coolant level and add the proper coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D. At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles (160,1600 and 10 000 km) Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. A Least Once a Month For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. Tire Inflation Check At Each Fuel Fill Cassette Deck Service It is important for you or a service station attendurzf to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. 7-42 Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See “Tires” in the Index for further details. At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) Air Cleaner FilterRestriction Indicator Check Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. Hydraulic ClutchSystem Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired at once. At Least Once aYear Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D. Your vehicle has an indicator on the engine that lets you know when the air cleaner filteris dirty and needs to be changed. Check indicator at least twice a year or when your oil is changed. See “Air Cleaner”in the Index for more information. Body Lubrication Service Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See “Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. Lubricate all fuel doors, body hood and body door hinges, tailgate and tailgate handle pivot points, latches, locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. 7-43 Starter Switch Check When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If does, it you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below, 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service 7-44 Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check (Automatic Transmission) b. CAUTION: d When you are doing thischeck, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, youor others could be injured. Follow the steps below, 1, Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2, Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’tstart the engine. Without applying the regular brake, tryto move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service. .,..”’ Steering Column Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the key to LOCK in each shift lever position. 0 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK (P) Mechanism Check With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). With a manual transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in REVERSE (R). On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key button. When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin tomove. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move. On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. To check the parking brake: With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes. 7-45 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index. Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. 7-46 Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection Inspect the hoses ana nave them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Drive Axle Service Brake System Inspection Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.For vehicles with rear drum brakes, also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks, Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers,parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer caseand add lubricant when necessary. Oil the control lever pivot point and all exposed control linkage. Check vent hose at transfer casefor kinks and proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use. 7-47 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer. IUSAGE Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) Engine Coolant I FLUID/LUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and GM Goodwrench@DEX-COOL or Havoline@DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze conforming to GM Specification 6277M. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index. TM 7-48 ~ ~~ USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Coolant Supplement Sealer GM Part No. 3634621 or equivalent with a complete flush and refill. Hydraulic Brake System Delco Supreme 1 1 Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 1052535 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). @ Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 12345347 or equivalent). System Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pt., 1050017 - 1 qt., or equivalent). USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Manual Transmission (5-Speed with Low Gear, RPO MW3) GM Goodwrench Synthetic Manual Transmission Gear Oil (GM Part No. 12346190 - 1 qt.), Castrol Syntorq@LT or equivalent SAE 75W-90 GL-4 gear oil. Chassis Lubrication Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344 or equivalent). Differential, Front and Rear Axle Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAE 80W-90 GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Differential, C3 (3500 HD) Trucks With Dana Rear Axle SAE 75W- 140Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Transfer Case DEXRON@-I11Automatic Transmission Fluid. Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Manual (GM Part No. 12345349 or Transmission (5-Speed without equivalent). Low Gear, RPO MG5) Automatic Transmission DEXRON@-111Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 1234624I or equivalent). Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2 Category LB or GC-LB. ~~~~~ ~ 7-49 USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Windshield Washer Solvent GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 10515 IS) or equivalent. Multi-pur ose lubricant, Superlube& (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Propeller Shaft SplineKJniversal Joint and Propeller Shaft Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seat, Fuel Door Hinge Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@(GM Part , No. 12346241 or equivalent). Tailgate Handle Multi-purpose lubricant, Pivot Points, Superlube@(GM Part Hinges, Latch No. 12346241 or equivalent). Bolt and Linkage Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@(GM Part No. I 234624 1 or equivalent). Gas Line Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part No. 1051516). See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs. 7-50 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed,record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services’’ or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to storethem. Maintenance Record DATE _- _ - ODOMETER READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED - 7-51 Maintenance Record DATE . 7-52 ODOMETER READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record DATE ODOMETER READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 7-53 Maintenance Record ~ ODOMETER SERVICED READING 7-54 BY ~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~ MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Chevroletif you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publicationsand how to report any safety defects. Customer Satisfaction Procedure This section includes informationon: 0 The Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0 Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone (TTY) Users 0 Roadside Assistance 0 Courtesy Transportation 0 BBB Auto Line -- Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 0 Reporting Safety Defects 0 Service and Owner Publications r- c Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Chevrolet. Normally, any concern you may have with your vehicle can be handled by your selling or servicing dealer. Your dealer has the facility, trained technicians, special tools and up-to-date information to promptly address any issue which may arise. Chevrolet has empowered its dealers to make decisions and repair vehicles, and they are eager toresolve your concern to your complete satisfaction. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, take the .following steps: For help outside of the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealer management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Service orParts Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolvedby the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. I n Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) o r 1-800-263-7854 (French). 8-2 0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4 135 (English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish) 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122 0 In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 13 15 0 In other overseas locations, call GM North American Export Sales in Canada at: 1-905-644-4 1 12. For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address, home and business telephone numbers Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) 0 Dealership name and location 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage Nature of concern We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet, write to: Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of Canadian and GM Overseas offices. When contacting Chevrolet,please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer's facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 8-3 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA ( I -800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membership is free, however some services may incur costs. Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer, Basic Cure and Courtesy" Cure: Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA Free towing for warranty repairs Basic over-the-phone technical advice To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. As the owner of a 1996 Chevrolet/Geo, membership in Roadside Assistance is free. Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie., wrecker services, locksmithkey service,glass repair, etc .) ROADSIDE Courtesy Cure PROVIDES: Roadside BLES~C Care services (as outlined above) Plus: 0 8-4 TM FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer from a legal roadway) 0 FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost on the road or locked inside) For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. 0 FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) 0 FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) 0 FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road) The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services. Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers of 1996 Chevrolet/Geo passenger carand light duty trucks. (Please seeyour selling dealer fordetails.) Note: Courtesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease Customers operating 1996 and newer ChevroletlGeo vehicles for a period of 36 months/36,000 miles, whichever occurs first.All Courtesy Care services must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer Service Management. Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves theright to modify or discontinueBasic Cure and Courtesy Care at any time. For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following availableto give to the advisor: 0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 License plate number 0 Vehicle color Vehicle location 0 Telephone number where you can be reached Vehicle mileage 0 Description of problem Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure inside your owner information portfolio for full program details. Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1996 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty trucks (please seeyour selling dealer for details). Courtesy Transportation includes: 0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair completed during the same day. 0 0 Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance for any overnight warranty repair up to fivedays, OR Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR 8-6 Up to $10 daily fuel allowancefor rides provided by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days. Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer service management. Claim amounts should reflect all actual costs. 0 Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time without notification. 0 For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer. In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation. Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 2 1 years of age. If you are under 2 1 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet will reimburse LIPt o $30/day for documented transportation you receive. For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, interim transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Proyam. Please consult your dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is available only in the United States and Canada. 0 GM Participation inBBB AUTO LINE -- Alternative Dispute Resolution Program* *This program may not be available in all states, depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/orto discontinue its participation in this program. Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle disputes between customers and automobile manufacturers. This program is available freeof charge to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203 Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Chevroletvoluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. 8-7 I To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name ' and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statement of the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary between you and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customers may present their case toan impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make.a decisionwhich you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made. Some statelaws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot-become involved in individual problems ,betweenyou, your dealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you mayeither callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT Service and Owner Publications If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediatelynotify Transport Canada,in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write: Lnevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, Michigan 48007-7047 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioLl H 8P7 Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and other serviceliterature are available for purchase for all current and many past model General Motors vehicles. Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information: United States . . . . . . . 1-800-55 1-4 123 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-668-5539 8-9 Service Manuals Service manuals contain diagnostic and repair information for all chassis and body systems. They may be useful for owners who wish to get a greater understanding of their vehicle. They are also useful for owners with the appropriate skill level or training who wish to perform “do-it-yourself” service. These are authentic General Motors service manuals meant for professional, qualified technicians. Service Bulletins Service bulletins covering various subjects are regularly sent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitors product performance in the field. When service methods are found which promote better service on GM vehicles, bulletins are created to help the technician perform better service. Service bulletins may involve any 8-10 number of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensive service; otherswill describe expensiveservice. Some will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and others may help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletins are meant for qualified technicians. In some cases bulletins refer to service manuals, specialized tools, equipment and safety procedures necessary to service the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughout the model year and beyond, an index is required and published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins. Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at the toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask a GM dealer to see an index or individual bulletin. Owner Publications Owner’s manuals, warranty folders and various owner assistance booklets provide owners with general operation and maintenance information. Section 9 Index Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 1-26 Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 1-23 How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22,2.59 1-26 Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 What Makes it M a t e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 6-16 Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check . . . . . . . . 7-43 3-3 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Refrigerants ..................... 6-76 Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 6-64 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 6-26 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 4-6 6-58 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Armrest Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Audio Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3-6 Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 6-19 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Startin8 Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Operatlon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 2-21 Axle, Locking Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 2-6 Replacement. Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2. 5-4 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 9-1 Brake 6-36 Adjustment .................................. 6-33 Fluid ....................................... Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 2-25 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing System Parts ........................ 6-36 2-61 System Warning Light ......................... Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Wear ....................................... 6-35 Brakes, Anti-Lock ............................... 4-6 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 2-8 Break-in, NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTSI Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 6-37 BulbReplacement .............................. 8-6 Canadian RoadsideAssistance .................... 6-74 Capacities and Specifications ...................... Carbon Monoxide ......................... 2.30.4.41 CargoLamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Cassette Deck Service ........................... 7-42 Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9. 3- 1 1 Cassette Tape Player Care ........................ 3-24 2-50 Cassette/Compact Disc Storage .................... Center Overhead Console ........................ 2-46 1-28 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 CertificationlTire Label .......................... 4-42 9-2 4-55 Chains.Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Chains.Tire ................................... 5-21 Changing a Flat Tire ............................. Charging SystemLight .......................... 2-59 Check Gages Light ............................... 2-67 Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 6-65 Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . 1-39. 1-41 Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 1-39 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 WheretoPut ................................ Cigarette Lighter ............................... 2-52 6-69 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-16 Cleaner. Air .................................... Cleaning Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Inside of Your Vehicle ......................... 6-58 instrument Panel ............................. 6-61 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-62 SpecialProblems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Stains ...................................... 6-60 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Climate Control System ....................... 3-1. 3-2 t Clock. Setting the ................................. 3-7 Clutch Fluid. Hydraulic .......................... 6-23 3-1 Comfort Controls ................................. Compact Disc Care . . . . i ......................... 3-24 3-1 5. 3-17 Compact Disc Player ....................... Compass. Rearview Mirror with .................... 2-44 Consble;Storage ................................. 2-49 4-5 Control of a Vehicle ............................... Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 2-12 Heater.Engine ............................... 5-14 Recovery Tank ............................... 5- 12 CoolingSystem ................................ 8-6 Courtesy Transportation ........................... : . . . 2-36 Cruise Control ............................. 2-49 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users. . . . . . . . . 8-3 Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure .................... 8- 1 Damage, Finish ............................... Damage. Sheet Metal ............................. Daytime Running Lamps ......................... Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defects, ReportingSafety ......................... Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 'Defogger, RearWindow .......................... Defoggng and Defrosting ......................... Dolby B NoiseReduction ........................ 6-64 6-64 2-40 2-67 5-2 8-8 4- 1 3-6 3-5 3-14 DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Door Locks ....................................... 2-4. 2-51 Storagepocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Third ......................................... 2-3 Downshifting .................................. 2-19 1- 13. Driver Position ................................. Driving City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Drunken .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2. 4-34Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 4-13 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InaBlizzard ................................. 4-40. 4-30 In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 . Off-Road .................................... 4-13 4-8 OnCurves ................................... On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 4-36 On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... 4-38 On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 32 WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Winter ....................................... 4-38 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 4-2 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E a s y Entry Seat ................................ 1-6 Electrica1.Equipment.Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 12. 3.23. 6-68 Electrical. System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 . 9-3 ........... L ' 7 Engine .. i .................................6.8. 6. 10 Coolant ..................................... I6-26 C, oolant Heater ....... ;....................... 2- 12 .. Coolant LevelCheck ...........................7-42 .. CoolantTemperatureGage .......................2-62 Cooling System Capacity ........................6-76 Exhaust ......................................2-30 FuseBlocks .............. ............... 6-69. 6-71 Identification ................................. 6-67 Manual Language Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 . . Overheating ....................... ;........... 5-10 . Running 'While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . .:........... 2-30 Specifications . i ...............................6-74 : ........2-1 1 Starting Your ........................ Underhood FuseRelay Center ................... 4-71 Engine Oil .............. .......................6-12 Adding ......................................6- 13 Additives ....................................6- 15 Checking. ..................................... 6- 12 Pressure Gage . . . .:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 . Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Exhaust. Engine ................................. 2-30 . Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59 Fan Control. Climate Control System .............3.1. 3.2 Fender Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Filling Your Tank ................................ 6-4 Filter. Air .....................................(i-16 Finish Care ..................................... 6-63 9-4 Finish Damage.................................... 6-64 Flashers. Hazard Warning .......................... 5-1 Flat Tire, Changing .............................. 5-21 . Fluid Capacities ......................... ,. . . . . . . 6-76 Fluids and Lubricants ............................. 7-48 Fog Lamps ...................................; .. 2-41 . Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Four-wheel Drive ......................... 2-21. 6-25 ............................ 11.. French Front Axle. ......................................6-26 Front Axle Locking Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . 6-40. 6-41 Fuel ............................................ 6-2 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 Gage ........................................2-68 In Foreign Countries ............................6-4 TankCapacity .......... : .................... 6-76 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 6-69 Fusible Links .....................................6-.69 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature.................... Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . .................... Fuel .................... .................... . Speedometer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... Voltmeter ................................... Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 2-65 2-68 2-57 2-57 ... 2-6U 2-46 4-42 Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13 Gear Positions. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17. 2- 18 GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................... 4-42.. Guide Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 1 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38.6.39 2-34 High/LowBeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 ........ 4-36 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tire Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Hood Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6-7 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 6-23 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Ignition Positims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 IlluminatedEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 DriveAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Radiator and Heater- Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 IntensityControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 2-42 Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................... JJump ack. Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 5-2 K e y Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 KeylessEntrySystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 9-5 Labels Certification ................................. 4-42 4-42 CertificatiodTire ............................. Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Lamps ........................................ 2-39 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 2-42 Dome ...................................... Interior ..................................... 2-42 OnReminder ................................ 2-39 2-41 UnderhoodReel .............................. 1-5 Latches. Seatback ................................ Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-5 Leaving.Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-28 Lighter ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Lights Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22. 2.59 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62.4.6 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 ChargingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 1.9. 2.58 Safety Belt Reminder ...................... Service Engine Soon .......................... 2-63 Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20.2.66 Loading Information. Truck-Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 4-42 Loading YourVehicle ........................... 2-32 LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locks 7-43 Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 KeyLock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 2-5 PowerDoor .................................. Steering Column Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Lubrication Service. Body ........................ 7-43 1-2 LumbarControls ................................ Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 7-51 MaintenanceRecord ............................ Maintenance Schedule ............................. 7-1 Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Long Trip/Highway Intervals ..................... 7-5 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 7-42 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-4 Short Trip/City Definition ....................... 7-4 Short TripKity Intervals ......................... Maintenance. Underbody ......................... 6-65 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 2-63 MalfunctionIndicatorLamp ...................... 1-1 ManualFrontSeat ............................... ManualMirror ................................. 2-45 Manual Transmission Check ...................................... 7-43 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 2-17. 2-18 Shifting ................................ 2-11 Starting Your Engine .......................... Manual Windows ............................... 2-31 2-49 MemoPadHolder .............................. Methanol ...................................... 6-3 Mirrors ....................................... 2-43 2-46 Convex Outside .............................. Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 2-43 Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... 2-45 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 vi ModelReference ................................. Mountain Roads ................................. 4-36 N e w Vehicle Break-In ........................... Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 4-29 6- 1 I Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Road Driving .............................. Off-Road Recovery ............................. Oil. Engine .................................... Opener. Garage Door ............................ Overheating Engine ............................. Owner Checks and Services ....................... Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 2-57 4- 13 4- I O 6-12 2-46 5- 10 7-42 Brake Mechanism Check ....................... 7-45 Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Over Things That Burn ........................ 2-29 4-58 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YourVehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 PassengerPosition .............................. 1-28 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Power Accessory Outlet ............................. 2-53 2-5 DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driver’sSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 6-68 Option Fuses ................................ 2-45 RemoteControlMirror ........................ 4-8 Steering ..................................... Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 4-60 Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Windows ................................... 1-27 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts .................... 5-1 Problems on the Road ............................ PTO ......................................... 4-60 8-9 Publications. Service and Owner .................... 8-9 P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................ 6-65 2-26 Park. Shifting Into .............................. Parking AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2-25 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Pressure Cap ........................... Radio Reception ................................ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain. Driving In ................................ ReadingLamps ................................ 5-17 6-30 3-23 3-6 4-30 2-42 9-7 Rear Axle ....................................... 6-24 1.30. 1-33 Outside Seat Position ..................... 1-30 SeatPassengers .............................. Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 3-6 WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 1-8 RearSeat .................................. Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 2-44 Electrochromic Day/Night ...................... 2-43 Inside Daymight ............................. 1-3 RecliningSeatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Recovery Hooks ................................ Recovery Tank, Coolant .......................... 5- 14 6-76 Refrigerants. Air Conditioning .................... Replacement Bulbs ................................. 6-37, 6-73 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Replacing Safety Belts ........................... 1-53 Reporting Safety Defects .......................... 8-8 Restraints 1-52 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Child ....................................... Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 7-43 Systemcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Right Front Passenger Position .................... Roadside Assistance .............................. 8-4 8-6 Roadside Assistance, Canadian ..................... RockingYourVehicle ........................... 5-33 Roof Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 9-8 Safety Belt Extender ............................ 1-52 SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 1 .13 Driver Position ............................... Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 1 .13 How to Wear Properly ......................... IncorrectUsage .................... 1-16. 1-50. 1-51 LapBelt .................................... 1-28 1-13. 1.31. 1-34 Lap-Shoulder ...................... 1-49 LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .12 Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . 1.30. 1-33 Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 1.9. 2.58 ReminderLight .......................... Replacing After a Crash ........................ 1-53 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .15 Smaller Children and Babies .................... 1-36 1-27 Use During Pregnancy ......................... WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Safety Defects. Reporting ......................... 8-8 ... 111 Safety Warnings and Symbols ....................... Scheduled Maintenance Services .................... 7-3 Seatback. Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Seatbacks. Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Seats 1-6 EasyEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Power Driver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Power Lumbar Control.......................... 1-2 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 1-8 Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . 1-39. 1-41.1-44.1-46 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 2-63 EngineSoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manuals, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 6-67 Parts Identitication Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Publications, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6- I Service and Owner Publications .................... 8-9 Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13. 2- 17. 2- I8 Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-66 Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Shifting Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Shifting, ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17, 2- 18 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Sound Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-23 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 6-74 Specifications.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 2-57 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 2-11 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 ColumnLockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4-8 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step-BumperPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 2-46 StorageAreas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Storage, Underhood ............................. 2-51 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 2-48 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Supplemental Intlatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Tailgate Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45.6.46 9-9 Tape Player Care ............................... 3-24 Temperature Control. Climate Control System . . . . . 3.1.3.3 Theft .......................................... 2-7 Theft-Deterrent Feature .......................... 3-2 1 THEFTLOCK" ................................ 3-21 Thermostat .................................... 6-30 2-3 ThirdDoor ..................................... TiltSteeringWheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Time. Setting the ................................ 3-7 Tirechains .................................... 6-57 TireLoading ................................... 4-42 Tires ......................................... 6-48 6-55 Alignment and Balance ........................ BuyingNew ................................. 6-53 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 5-21 ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Cleaning .................................... Inflation .................................... 6-49 7-42 Inflation Check ............................... 6-50 Inspection and Rotation ........................ Loading ..................................... 4-42 6-49 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature ................................. 6-55 6-54 Traction .................................... Treadwear ................................... 6-54 Uniform Quality Grading ....................... 6-54 6-52 Wear Indicators .............................. 6-55 Wheel Replacement ........................... 6-52 When It's Time for New ....................... TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 9-10 5.28.6.75 Torque. Wheel Nut ......................... Towing a Trailer ................................ 4-46 Towing Your Vehicle ............................. 5-7 Trailer 4-55 Brakes ..................................... 4-57 Driving on Grades ............................ Drivingwith ................................. 4-55 Hitches ..................................... 4-54 Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-59 Parking on Hills .............................. 4-58 Safety Chains ................................ 4-55 Tongueweight ............................... 4-53 Total Weight on Tires .......................... 4-54 Towing ..................................... 4-46 Turnsignals ................................. 4-57 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Wiring Harness ............................... 4-59 Transfer Case. Electronic ......................... 2-23 6-25 Transfer Case Lubricant .......................... Transfer Case. Manual ........................... 2-21 Transmission Fluid Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 6-22 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................ 2-5 Transportation.Courtesy .......................... 8-6 TripOdometer ................................. 2-57 TTYUsers ..................................... 8-3 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Turn SignalMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 Underbody Maintenance ........................ Underhood Fuse/Relay Center ..................... Underhood Reel Lamp ........................... Underhood Storage ............................. 6-65 6-7 I 2-41 2-5 1 Vehicle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DamageWarnings .............................. Identification Number ......................... Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation System ............................... Visors.Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 iv 6-67 4-42 6-37 3-4 2-53 2-60 w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ 6-3 1 WashingYourVehicle ........................... 6-62 6-62 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel 6-55 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nut Torque ............................. 5.28. 6.75 6-55 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockout Switch .............................. 2-32 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Sliding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 2-32 Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Washer' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. 6-31 7-42 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47, 6-75 BladeReplacement ...................... 6-68 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Wiring,Headlamp .............................. 5-22 Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 NOTES 9-12 c